SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SAP

SAP (SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS & PRODUCTS IN DATA PROCESSING)

SAP IS AN ERP PACKAGE

ERP (ENTERPRICE RESOURCE PLANNING)

ERP specifies the planning in all the departments in an organization.

E.G. RANBAXY COMPANY

SALES PURCHASE

PLANNING PLANNING

PRODUCTION FINANANCE

PLANNING PLANNING

ERP specifies how to utilize 4M’s

1. MONEY
2. MATERIALS
3. MACHINARY
4. MAN POWER

Other ERP packages

- ORACLE
- PEOPLE SOFT
- BAAN
- SIEBEL
- JD EDWARDS
- MICROSOFT DYNAMICS

1|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ADVANTAGES OF SAP

- SAP will have solution for all the departments in an organization.

- SAP is tightly integrated product. (Fully automated application that interlinks all the
departmental transaction processes)
Examples for transaction in sales department (Inquiry, Quotation, Sales order, Delivery,
Invoice)

VERSIONS IN SAP

- 3.0 (1980’s)
- 4.6
- 4.6c
- 4.7
- 5.0
- 6.0 (Present)
1. Enhancement packages
2. EHP1
3. EHP2
4. EHP3
5. EHP4
6. EHP4
7. EHP5
8. EHP6
9. EHP7
10. EHP8 (Present)

The most successful version in SAP SD is 6.0

The difference between the version to version is upgradation of the product.

Whenever the business requirement changes SAP will release new version.

After 6.0 version, whenever the business requirement changes SAP is releasing new enhancement
package.

The present enhancement package is EHP8.

The difference between one enhancement package to other is upgradation of the product.

SAP consultants are classified into 2 types

1. Functional consultants
2. Technical consultants

2|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SAP CONSULTANTS

FUNCTIONAL CONSULTANTS TECHNICAL CONSULTANTS

SD - Sales & Distribution ABAP - Coding

FI - Finance BASIS - Maintain

MM - Materials Management server &

PP - Production planning Networking

SAP SD BASIC PROCESS

INQUIRY QUOTATION SALES ORDER DELIVERY INVOICE

SAP ARCHITECTURE

SAP is a 3-Tier architecture

CLIENT

(E.g., ALKEM LABORATORIES WANT TO IMPLEMENT SAP)

Client has to purchase License from SAP

Client has to purchase various licenses based on end users

(E.g., for 1500 users, 1500 x Approx. 80,000 = 12 Crores)

End user is the employee of client who will use SAP

3|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SAP ARCHITECTURE

END USER 1
1
APPLICATION LAYER
MONTHLY SALES
REPORT
2

PRESENTATION
LAYER
END USER 2
DATABASE LAYER
PURCHASE
REPORT

END USER 3

SAP Architecture is a 3-tier architecture

In 3-tier architecture we have 3 layers

1. Presentation Layer
2. Application Layer
3. Database Layer

Presentation Layer:

The system used by End users will be called as presentation layer.

Any request raised by presentation layer will be first taken by application layer in a sequence and
send the request to data base layer and take the data and send it back to presentation layer.

Application layer will act as mediator between presentation layer and data base layer.

Data base layer consist of the actual data.

4|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SAP LANDSCAPE

Landscape means arrangement of servers.

Any client if they want to implement SAP, they have to purchase servers.

SAP suggest to purchase minimum 3 servers.

1. Development Server (Configuration)

2. Quality Server (Testing)
3. Production Server

DEVELOPMENT SERVER QUALITY SERVER PRODUCTION SERVER

Development Server:

It is used to configure the client’s business process into SAP.

It is used by consultants.

Quality Server:

It is used to test the scenario (Testing).

It is used by consultants and Core users.

Core user is the employee of client who is having good experience and exposure in client’s business
process (Senior Managers)

Production Server:

It is the live server, where users will enter day to day live transactions in SAP.

Examples for Live transactions in SD are Inquiry, Quotation, Sales order, Delivery and Invoice.

Production Server will be used by Users (Core Users and End Users).

Core user is the employee of client who is having good experience and exposure in client’s business
process.

End user is the employee of client who will do day to day transactions in SAP.

5|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

TYPES OF PROJECTS

1. Implementation Project:

Implementation means configuring the client’s business process newly into SAP, who might
be using some legacy system (Legacy means non-SAP).

2. Support Project

Support project means Solving the tickets (Errors/Issues) raised by the client who already
implemented SAP.

LOGGING INTO SAP

1. Double click on SAP log on pad on desktop.

2. Double click on IDES (Internet Demonstration and evaluation system) (IDES is a Demo
system)
3. Mention Client – 800 (800 is a Training client)
User ID - ******
Password - ******
4. When we enter into SAP the default screen is SAP easy access.
5. End Users will work in SAP easy access. (User is the employee of client who will use SAP)
6. Consultants will work in IMG (Implementation guide) Screen.
7. Enter SPRO (SAP Project Reference Object) in T-Code (Transaction Code) Bar.
8. Press Enter and click on SAP Reference IMG.
9. IF we are in other than Easy access screen, System will not identify the T-Codes, we have to
enter either /N or /O before the T-Code.
10. /N over writes the present session.
11. /O open a new session without the disturbing the present session.
12. Maximum we can have 6 sessions at a time.
13. To Logout from SAP Click on System on Menu Bar and click on Log Off.

6|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE
Enterprise structure specifies the structure of the organization.

e.g., Head Office, Branch Offices, Manufacturing plant locations etc.

ORGANIZATION UNITS RESPONSIBLE LENGTH

1. COMPANY CODE FI CONSULTANT 4

2. SALES ORGANZATION SD CONSULTANT 4
3. DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL SD CONSULTANT 2
4. DIVISION SD CONSULTANT 2
5. SALES OFFICE SD CONSULTANT 4
6. SALES GROUP SD CONSULTANT 3
7. PLANT MM CONSULTANT 4
8. STORAGE LOCATION MM CONSULTANT 4
9. SHIPPING POINT SD CONSULTANT 4

1. COMPANY CODE

It is an organization unit which is responsible for all-external financial transactions which

happens in the company.

External financial transactions are Balance sheet, Profit & Loss Statement.

Every company has to prepare Balance sheet, Profit & Loss statement on the name of company
code.

Company code is a legal entity which is registered under companies act 2013.

If we want to startup any business first, we have to register the company under companies act
2013.

On which name we register the company that will be defined as company code in SAP.

FI consultant is responsible to define company code.

The length of the company code is 4 digits.

In our project we have one company code i.e.,

CODE NAME

H100 ALKEM LABORATORIES LIMITED, Lower Parel West, Mumbai

The Code can be Numeric, Alphanumeric or Characters.

Code is for SAP internal purpose.

The below scenarios client will have multiple company codes

1. Group of Companies (e.g., Tata group – Tata Motors, Tata Steel, Tata Power, TCS etc.), Birla,
Reliance etc.
2. MNCs (Multi-National Companies having operations in multiple countries).

7|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

2. SALES ORGANIZATION

It is an organizational unit which is responsible for all sales and services which happens in the
company.

It is an organizational unit where strategic decisions related to sales will be taken.

It is a physical location where we find higher management of sales (Director Sales, Vice-President
Sales)

HIGHER MANAGEMENT OF SALES

Director of Sales

Vice President Sales

(Strategic Decisions Related to Sales)

Reports to

HYDERABAD BRANCH OFFICE

Telangana Sales

Branch Manager

Senior Sales Manager

SD consultant is responsible to define Sales organization.

The length of Sales Organization is 4 digits.

In our project we have 2 sales organizations and the code is

CODE NAME

H100 ALKEM DOMESTIC SALES ORGANIZATION

H200 ALKEM EXPORT SALES ORGANIZATION

8|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

3. DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

The way of selling the goods to End customer or the way of distributing the goods to End customer.

SD consultant is responsible to define distribution channel.

The Code length of Distribution channel is 2 Digits.

In our project we have 4 distribution channels

CODE NAME

H1 DEALERS

H2 DISTRIBUTORS

H3 INSTITUTIONS

H4 DIRECT

ALKEM

DISTRIBUTORS DEALERS INSTITUTIONS DIRECT

(Hospitals)

(Corporate Customers)

(Govt Hospitals, Private Hospitals)

MEDICAL STORE MEDICAL STORE

END CUSTOMER

9|Page
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

4. DIVISION

Range of Products or Product line.

SD Consultant is responsible to define division.

The length of Division Code is 2 Digits.

In our project we have 6 divisions.

CODE NAME

H1 GYNAECOLOGY

H2 PEDIATRIC

H3 INSULIN

H4 ANTIBIOTIC

H5 CARDIOLOGY

H6 ORTHOPEDIC

10 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

5. SALES OFFICE (BRANCH OFFICE)

It is a physical location where group of people work together to perform sales.

ALKEM HEAD OFFICE MUMBAI

Director of Sales
Vice President Sales
(Strategic Decisions Related to Sales)

Reports to

TELANGANA SALES OFFICE TAMILNADU SALES OFFICE

(HYDERABAD) (CHENNAI)
Branch Manager Branch Manager
Sales Manager Sales Manager
Medical Representatives Medical Representatives

SD consultant is responsible to define sales office.

The length of sales office code is 4 digits.

In our project we have 25 sales offices allover India but for practice purpose define only 1 sales
office.

CODE NAME

H100 TELANGANA SALES OFFICE

11 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

6. SALES GROUP

Group of people within a sales office but working for different activities. Example below

HDFC SALES OFFICE

3rd Floor
Vehicle Loans
2nd Floor
Personal Loans
1st Floor
Home Loans

SD Consultant is responsible to define sales group.

The length of sales group is 3 digits.

In our project we have 2 sales groups.

CODE NAME

H10 INSULIN & ANTIBIOTIC

H20 OTHER GROUP

12 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

7. PLANT

Manufacturing Plant:

It is a physical location where we do the process of manufacturing finished goods. (Finished goods is
the final product which is ready to sell).

MM consultant is responsible to define manufacturing plant in SAP.

The length of plant code is 4 digits.

In our project we have 2 manufacturing plants.

CODE NAME

H100 MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT

H200 VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT

Depot:

It is a physical location where we store the finished goods for easy distribution of goods to the
customers. (Maintained by company).

TELANGANA

MUMBAI DEALER
MANUFACTURING PLANT DEPOT

C&F (CARRY & FORWARD):

It is a physical location where we store the finished goods for easy distribution of goods to the
customers, maintained by 3rd party person.

C&F will get 2% commission in every invoice.

TELANGANA

MUMBAI DEALER
MANUFACTURING PLANT
C&F

13 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

RM - Raw Materials

VENDOR - Is a person who will supply the raw materials.

SF - Semi Finished

FG - Finished Goods

As per example we have 5 storage locations

1. Raw material storage location

2. Semi-finished storage location
3. Finished goods 1 Storage location
4. Finished goods 2 storage location
5. Return storage location

In our Example we have 3 shipping points

1. Manual shipping point

2. Automatic shipping point
3. Immediate shipping point

Whenever customer return the goods then we store the goods in Return storage.

Delicate products will be sent to manual shipping point and here labor will load the goods manually.

Normal products will be sent to automatic shipping point and here machinery will load the goods.

Sometime if delivery is urgent then we will use immediate shipping point.

After loading the goods, we will give Delivery chalan copy and Invoice copy to truck person. Then
only truck will leave the plant.

14 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

8. STORAGE LOCATION

It is a physical location where we store the goods within a plant.

MM Consultant is responsible to define storage location.

The length is storage location is 4 digits.

In our project we have 5 storage locations in each plant.

H100 MUMBAI PLANT H200 VAPI PLANT

H101 RM STORAGE LOCATION H201 RM STORAGE LOCATION

H102 SF STORAGE LOCATION H202 SF STORAGE LOCATION

H103 FG1 STORAGE LOCATION H203 FG1 STORAGE LOCATION

H104 FG2 STORAGE LOCATION H204 FG2 STORAGE LOCATION

H105 RET STORAGE LOCATION H205 RET STORAGE LOCATION

9. SHIPPING POINT

It is the physical location where we do the process of loading the goods.

SD Consultant is responsible to define Shipping location.

The Length of shipping point is 4 digits.

In our project each plant we have 3 shipping points in each plant.

H100 MUMBAI PLANT H200 VAPI PLANT

H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT

H102 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POINT H102 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POIN

H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POIN

15 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE COMPANY CODE IN SAP

FI consultant is responsible to define company code in SAP.

The length of Company Code is 4 digits.
In our project one company code i.e.,

CODE COMPANY NAME

H100 ALKEM LABORATORIES LIMITED

LOWER PAREL WEST
MUMBAI

PATH TO DEFINE COMPANY CODE

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

EDIT, COPY, DELETE, CHECK COMPANY CODE (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)
DOUBLE CLICK ON EDIT COMPANY CODE DATA

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIES

MENTION COMPANY CODE - H100 (F4 for Search)

MENTION COMPANY NAME - ALKEM LABORATORIES LIMITED
CITY - MUMBAI
COUNTRY - IN
CURRENCY - INR
LANGUAGE - EN

CLICK ON ADDRESS (Shift + 5)

MENTION THE TITLE AS COMPANY

MENTION THE NAME - ALKEM LABORATORIES LIMITED
MENTION THE SEARCH TERM -
SEARCH TERM (It is the short cut key to search the company information)
MENTION THE SEARCH TERM - ALK H100
MENTION THE STREET - ALKEM HOUSE, LOWER PAREL WEST
MENTION THE HOUSE NO - 9-9-9
MENTION THE POSTAL CODE - 200070 (As per the city code)
MENTION THE CITY - MUMBAI
COUNTRY - IN
REGION (STATE) - 13
LANGUAGE - EN
PRESS ENTER AND CLICK ON SAVE (CTRL + S)
WHEN WE SAVE SYSTEM WILL ASK FOR REQUEST NUMBER
CLICK ON CREATE REQUEST (F8)
GIVE SHORT DESCRIPTION - CREATING ALKEM ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE
PRESS ENTER
SYSTEM WILL GENERATE THE AUTOMATIC NUMBER
CLICK ON CONTINUE AFTER GETTING THE REQUEST NUMBER
WE WILL GET A MESSAGE (DATA WAS SAVED)

16 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

LOCKED DATA

While practicing if we get message the data is locked by user then click on No, Close the window, Go
to the T Code /NSM12 Press Enter

Remove the USER NAME Click on LIST SELECT ALL (F5) Click on DELETE

DELETE LOCK ENTERY SCREEN CLICK ON YES CLOSE THE WINDOW

If we want to some changes in already created company code then go to same path

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

EDIT, COPY, DELETE, CHECK COMPANY CODE (DOUBLE CLICK ON EDIT COMPANY CODE DATA)

17 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE SALES ORGANISATION IN SAP

SD Consultant is responsible to SALES ORGANISATION.

The length of SALES ORGANIZATION is 4 Digits.

In our project we have 2 SALES ORGANISATIONS

CODE NAME

H100 ALKEM DOMESTIC SALES ORGANISATION

H200 ALEKM EXPORT SALES ORGANISATION

PATH TO DEFINE SALES ORGANIZATION IN SAP (DOMESTIC)

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION SALES & DISTRIBUTION

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK SALES ORGANISATION (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE SALES ORGANISATION

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIES

SALES ORGANISATION - H100, ALEKM DOMESTIC SALES ORGANISATION

STATISTICS CURRENCY - INR

SALES ORG. CALENDAR - 01

PRESS ENTER

AGAIN, PRESS ENTER

18 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CLICK ON ADDRESS

TITLE - BLANK

NAME - ALEKM DOMESTIC SALES ORGANISATION

SEARCH TERM - ALK H100

STREET - ALEKM HOUSE, LOWER PAREL WEST 99/9/999

POSTAL CODE - 200070

CITY - MUMBAI

COUNTRY - IN

REGION - 13

LANGUAGE - EN

PRESS ENTER

SAVE

PRESS ENTER

WE WILL GET REQUEST NUMBER AUTOMATICALLY

CLICK ON CONTINUE

PATH TO DEFINE SALES ORGANIZATION IN SAP (EXPORT)

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION SALES & DISTRIBUTION

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK SALES ORGANISATION

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE SALES ORGANISATION

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIES

SALES ORGANISATION - H200, ALEKM EXPORT SALES ORGANISATION

STATISTICS CURRENCY - INR

SALES ORG. CALENDAR - 01

PRESS ENTER

WE WILL RECEIVE A ERROR MESSAGE

AGAIN, PRESS ENTER

19 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CLICK ON ADDRESS

TITLE - BLANK

NAME - ALEKM EXPORTS SALES ORGANISATION

SEARCH TERM - ALK H200

STREET - ALEKM HOUSE, LOWER PAREL WEST 99/9/999

POSTAL CODE - 200070

CITY - MUMBAI

COUNTRY - IN

REGION - 13

LANGUAGE - EN

PRESS ENTER

SAVE

PRESS ENTER

WE WILL GET REQUEST NUMBER AUTOMATICALLY

CLICK ON CONTINUE

20 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

SD CONSULTANT IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEFINE DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

THE LENGTH OF DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL IS 2 DIGITS

IN OUR PROJECT WE HAVE 4 DISTRIBUTION CHANNELS

CODE NAME

H1 DEALERS

H2 DISTRIBUTORS

H3 INSTITUTIONS

H4 DIRECT

PATH TO DEFINE DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION SALES & DISTRIBUTION

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIES (F5)

MENTION THE BELOW

CLICK ON SAVE

21 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE DIVISION
SD CONSULTANT IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEFINE DIVISION.

THE LENGTH OF DIVISION IS 2 DIGITS.

IN OUR PROJECT WE HAVE 6 DIVISIONS.

CODE NAME

H1 GYNAECOLOGY

H2 PEDIATRIC

H3 INSULIN

H4 ANTIBIOTIC

H5 CARDIOLOGY

H6 ORTHOPEDIC

PATH TO DEFINE DIVISION

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION LOGISTICS GENERAL

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK DIVISION (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE DIVISION

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIES (F5)

MENTION THE BELOW

PRESS ENTER AND SAVE IT

22 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MAINTAIN SALES OFFICE

It is a physical location where group of people work together to perform Sales.

SD consultant is responsible to maintain sales office.

The length of Sales office CODE is 4 digits.

In our project we have 25 Sales offices, But for practice purpose define only 1 sales office.

CODE NAME

H100 TELANGANA SALES OFFICE

PATH TO MAINTAIN SALES OFFICE

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION SALES & DISTRIBUTION

MAINTAIN SALES OFFICE (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIEES

SALES OFFICE : H100

DESCRIPTION : TELANGANA SALES OFICE

PRESS ENTER & MAINTAIN ADRESS

TITLE : BLANK

NAME : TELANGANA SALES OFFICE

SEARCH TERM : TEL

STREET : BEGUMPET

[Link] : 1-9-1

POSTAL CODE : 500035

CITY : HYDERABAD

COUNTRY : IN

REGION : 36

LANGUAGE : EN

PRESS ENTER & SAVE

23 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MAINTAIN SALES GROUP

Group of people within a Sales office for working for different activities.

SD consultant is responsible to maintain sales group.

The length of Sales group CODE is 3 digits.

In our project we have 2 Sales Groups

CODE NAME

H10 INSULIN AND ANTIBIOTIC GROUP

H20 OTHER GROUP

PATH TO MAINTAIN SALES GROUP

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION SALES & DISTRIBUTION

MAINTAIN SALES GROUP (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIEES

SALES GROUP DESCRIPTION

H10 INSULIN AND ANTIBIOTIC GROUP

H20 OTHER GROUP

PRESS ENTER & SAVE

24 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE PLANT

It is a physical location where we do the process of manufacturing finished goods.

MM consultant is responsible to define Plant.

The length of Plant CODE is 4 digits.

In our project we have 2 manufacturing plants.

CODE NAME

H100 MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT

H200 VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT

PATH TO DEFINE PLANT

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION LOGISTICS GENERAL

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK PLANT (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE PLANT

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIEES

PLANT : H100

NAME 1 : MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT

PRESS ENTER

CLICK ON ADRESS & MAINTAIN ADDRESS

TITLE : BLANK

NAME : MUMABI MANUFACTURING PLANT

SEARCH TERM : MUM

STREET : NMDC, AIROLI, NAVI MUMBAI

H. NUMBER : 4-10-99

POSTAL CODE : 200060

CITY : MUMBAI

COUNTRY : IN

REGION : 13

LANGUAGE : EN

25 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PRESS ENTER & SAVE IT CROSS CHECK THE ADDRESS AND CLICK ON CONTINUE.

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION LOGISTICS GENERAL

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK PLANT (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE PLANT

CLICK ON NEW ENTRIEES

PLANT : H200

NAME 2 : VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT

PRESS ENTER

CLICK ON ADRESS & MAINTAIN ADDRESS

TITLE : BLANK

NAME : VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT

SEARCH TERM : VAP

STREET : VAPI

H. NUMBER : 9-9-99

POSTAL CODE : 420010

CITY : VAPI

COUNTRY : IN

REGION : 06

LANGUAGE : EN

PRESS ENTER & SAVE IT CROSS CHECK THE ADDRESS AND CLICK ON CONTINUE. (ENTER)

26 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MAINTAIN STORAGE LOCATION

It is a physical location where we store the goods within a plant.

MM Consultant is responsible to maintain storage location.

The length of storage location is 4 digits.

In our project each plant we have 5 storage locations.

H100 MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT

H101 RAW MATERIAL STORAGE LOCATION

H102 SEMI FINISHED STORAGE LOCATION

H103 FINISHED GOODS 1 STORAGE LOCATION

H104 FINISHED GOODS 2 STORAGE LOCATION

H105 RETURN STORAGE LOCATION

H200 VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT

H201 RAW MATERIAL STORAGE LOCATION

H202 SEMI FINISHED STORAGE LOCATION

H203 FINISHED GOODS 1 STORAGE LOCATION

H204 FINISHED GOODS 2 STORAGE LOCATION

H205 RETURN STORAGE LOCATION

27 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PATH TO MAINTAIN STORAGE LOCATION

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

MAINTAIN STORAGE LOCATION (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

MENTION THE PLANT : H100

ENTER

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

SLoc Description

H101 RM STORAGE LOC

H102 SF STORAGE LOC
H103 FG1 STORAGE LOC
H104 FG1 STORAGE LOC
H105 RET STORAFE LOC

CLICK ON SAVE

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

MAINTAIN STORAGE LOCATION (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

MENTION THE PLANT : H200

ENTER

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

SLoc Description

H201 RM STORAGE LOC

H202 SF STORAGE LOC
H203 FG1 STORAGE LOC
H204 FG1 STORAGE LOC
H205 RET STORAFE LOC

CLICK ON SAVE

28 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE SHIPPING POINT

It is a physical location where we do the process of loading the goods.

SD Consultant is responsible to define Shipping point.

The length of shipping point code is 4 digits.

In our project each project each plant we have 3 shipping points.

CODE NAME

H100 MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT

H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT

H102 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POINT

H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT

H200 VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT

H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT

H102 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POINT

H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT

PATH TO DEFINE SHIPPING POINT

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION LOGISTICS EXECUTION

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK SHIPPING POINT

DEFINE SHIPPING POINT (DOUBLE CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

SHIPPING POINT : H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT (MUMBAI)

FACTORY CALENDAR : 01

CLICK ENTER

CLICK ON ADDRESS

TITLE : BLANK
NAME : MUMBAI MANUAL SHIPPING POINT
STREET/[Link] : NMDC, AIROLI, NAVI MUMBAI 5-9-9
POSTAL CODE : 200070
CITY : MUMBAI
COUNTRY : IN

29 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

REGION : 13
LANGUGAE : EN
PRESS ENTER
CLICK ON SAVE
CROSS CHECK AND PRESS ENTER

CONTINUE

REPEAT THE PROCESS FOR REMAINING SHIPPING POINTS.

30 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ASSSIGNMENT OF ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE

Assignment of Enterprise structure means maintaining relationship between the organizational

units.

1. ASSIGN SALES ORGANIZATION TO COMPANY CODE

COMPANY CODE H100 (ALKEM LABORATORIES LIMITED)

SALES ORGANIZATION H100 H200

DOMESTIC EXPORTS

The relationship between Company Code and Sales Organization is One to Many. That means one
Company Code can have many Sales Organizations but One Sales organization should be assigned to
only one company code.

PATH

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT SALES AND DISTRIBUTION

ASSIGN SALES ORGANIZATION TO COMPANY CODE

GO TO YOUR SALES ORGANISATION (CLICK ON POSITION)

MENTION THE COMPANY CODE ENTER AND SAVE

31 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

If the system is asking for other organizations, then click on CANCEL

Click on YES in the opened dialogue box

Click on SAVE

Again, Click on CANCEL , Click on YES in the opened dialogue box.

Press Enter.

32 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SD Consultant is responsible to assign Sales Organization to company code.

2. ASSIGN DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL TO SALES ORGANIZATION

SALES ORGANIZATION H100 H200

DIST. CHANNEL H1 H2 H3 H4 H4

DELAER DISTRIBUTOR INSTITUTION DIRECT DIRECT

SD CONSULTANT is responsible to assign Distribution Channel to sales organization.

The relationship between Sales Organization and Distribution Channel is Many to Many. That is One
Sales Organization can have many Distribution Channels and One Distribution Channel can be
assigned to many Sales Organizations.

The combination of Sales Organization and Distribution Channel is called as SALES LINE

In our project we have 5 Sales Line

SALES ORGANIZATION DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

H100 H1

H100 H2

H100 H3

H100 H4

H200 H4

PATH

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT SALES AND DISTRIBUTION

ASSIGN DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL TO SALES ORGANIZATION GO TO NEW ENTRIES (F5)

CLICK ON SAVE (Ctrl + S).

33 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

3. ASSIGN DIVISION TO SALES ORGANIZATION

SD Consultant is responsible for this assignment for this assignment.

ALKWM DOMESTIC ALKEM EXPORT

SALES ORG H100 H200

DIVI H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6

The relationship between Sales organization and Division is Many to Many. i.e., One Sales
Organization can have many Divisions and One Division can be assigned to many Sales Organizations.

PATH

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT SALES AND DISTRIBUTION

ASSIGN DIVISION TO SALES ORGANIZATION

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION

[Link] DIV

H100 H1

H100 H2

H100 H3

H100 H4

H100 H5

H100 H6

H200 H1

H200 H2

H200 H3

H200 H4

H200 H5

H200 H6

CLICK ON SAVE (SYSTEM WILL TAKE THE NAMES AUTOMATICALLY)

34 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

4. SETUP SALES AREA

Sales Area is the combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel and Division.

[Link] H100 (DOMESTIC)

[Link] H1 H2 H3 H4

DIVI H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6

[Link] H200 (EXPORT)

H4

H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6

SD Consultant is responsible to setup Sales Area.

In our Project we have 30 Salaes Areas.

[Link] [Link] DIV

H100 H1 H1
H100 H1 H2
H100 H1 H3
H100 H1 H4
H100 H1 H5
H100 H1 H6
H100 H2 H1
H100 H2 H2
H100 H2 H3
H100 H2 H4
H100 H2 H5
H100 H2 H6
35 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

H100 H3 H1
H100 H3 H2
H100 H3 H3
H100 H3 H4
H100 H3 H5
H100 H3 H6
H100 H4 H1
H100 H4 H2
H100 H4 H3
H100 H4 H4
H100 H4 H5
H100 H4 H6

H200 H4 H1
H200 H4 H2
H200 H4 H3
H200 H4 H4
H200 H4 H5
H200 H4 H6

PATH

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT SALES AND DISTRIBUTION

SETUP SALES AREA

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PRESS ENTER AFTER ENTERING EACH SALES

ORGANISATION (OPTIONAL)

(WE CAN PRESS ENTER AFTER ENTERING ALL

THE ENTRIES ALSO)

CLICK ON SAVE

REPEAT THE SAME PROCESS AGAIN FOR

EXPORT ORGANIZATION

CLICK ON SAVE

CROSS CHECK FOR ALL THE ENTRIES ARE

DONE OR NOT.

36 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

5. ASSIGN SALES OFFICE TO SALES AREA

SD CONSULTANT IS RESPONSIBLE TO ASSIGN SALES OFFCIE TO SALES AREA

[Link] H100 (DOMESTIC)

[Link] H1 H2 H3 H4

DIVI H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6

[Link] H100 (TELANGANA SALES OFFICE)

PATH

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT SALES AND DISTRIBUTION

ASSIGN SALES OFFICE TO SALES AREA

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

ENTER ALL THE ENTRIES

CLICK ON SAVE

DO THE SAME PROCESS FOR EXPORT

ORGANIZATION

37 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

6. ASSIGN SALES GROUP TO SALES OFFICE

SD Consultant is responsible to assign Sales group to Sales Office.

The Relationship is Many to Many.

SALES OFFICE H100 (TELANGANA SALES OFFICE)

SALES GROUP H10 H20

(INSULIN & ANTIBIOTIC) (OTHER GROUP)

[Link] [Link]

H100 H10

H100 H20

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT

SALES AND DISTRIBUTION ASSIGN SALES GROUP TO SALES OFFICE

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

ENTER SALES OFFICE AND SALES GROUP

CLICK ON SAVE

38 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

7. ASSIGN PLANT TO COMPANY CODE

MM Consultant is responsible for this assignment.

The relationship between Company code and Plant is One to Many. That means one company code
can have many plants but one plant should be assigned to only one company code.

COMPANY CODE H100 (ALKEM LABORATORIES LTD)

PLANT H100 H200

(MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT) (VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT)

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT

LOGISTICS GENERAL ASSIGN PLANT TO COMPANY CODE (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION

[Link] PLANT

H100 H100

H100 H200

CLICK ON SAVE

39 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

8. ASSIGN SALES ORGANIZATION - DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL - PLANT

SD Consultant is responsible for this assignment.

We can also call it as Assign Sales Line to Plant.

[Link] [Link] PLANT

H100 H1 H100

H100 H2 H100

H100 H3 H100

H100 H4 H100

H200 H4 H100

H100 H1 H200

H100 H2 H200

H100 H3 H200

H100 H4 H200

H200 H4 H200

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT

SALES AND SISTRIBUTION ASSIGN SALES ORGANIZATION-DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL-

PLANT (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION THE ENTRIES

CLICK ON SAVE
40 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

9. ASSIGN SHIPPING POINT TO PLANT

SD Consultant is responsible for this assignment.

Relationship is many to many.

PLANT H100 H200

(MUMBAI MANUFACTURING PLANT) (VAPI MANUFACTURING PLANT)

H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT H201 [Link].P

H102 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POINT H202 [Link].P

H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT H203 [Link].P

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMENT

LOGISTICS EXECUTION ASSIGN SHIPPING POINT TO PLANT

(CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

GO TO FIND OPTION (CTRL + F)

MENTION PLANT CODE

ENTER

41 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CLICK ON THE PLANT CODE

SELECT THE PLANT CODE

CLICK ON ASSIGN

42 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CTRL + F

MENTION SHIPPING POINT CODE

ENTER

CLICK ON THE SHIPPING POINT CODE

SELECT SHIPPING POINTS

ENTER

SAVE

THE T CODE TO SEE THE TOTAL ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE IS /NEC01

CLICK ON STRUCTURE
CLICK ON NAVIGATION
CLICK ON CONTINUE
CTRL + F (OR SCROLL DOWN TO FIND IT MANUALLY)
ENTER THE COMPANY CODE
DOUBLE CLICK ON COMPNAY CODE

43 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

OTHER ORGANIZATIONAL UNITS

1. COMPANY

Company is Organizational unit which will group multiple company codes into one.

TATA GROUP

COMPANY CODES: TATA STEEL TATA MOTORS TCS

FI Consultant is responsible to define Company.

The Length of Company Code is 6 Digits.

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING DEFINE COMPANY (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

2. BUSINESS AREA

Business Area is the Organizational unit which will helps to generate internal Balance sheets plant
wise.

FI Consultant is responsible to define Business Area.

The Length of Business Area Code is 4 Digits.

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING DEFINE BUSINESS AREA (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

3. CREDIT CONTROL AREA

It is an Organizational Unit which specifies Group of people responsible for Credit activities (Credit
department).

FI Consultant is responsible to define Credit Control Area.

The Length of Credit Control Area Code is 4 Digits.

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING DEFINE CREDIT CONTROL AREA (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

44 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

4. CONTROLLING AREA

It is an Organizational unit which specifies Group of people responsible for Cost controlling activities
(Controlling department).

CO Consultant is responsible to define Controlling Area.

The Length of Controlling Area Code is 4 Digits.

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

CONTROLLING MAINTAIN CONTROLLING AREA (CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

5. PURCHASING ORGANIZATION

It is an Organizational unit which is responsible for All Purchases which happens in the company
(Purchase Department).

MM Consultant is responsible for define Purchasing Organization.

The Length of Purchasing Organization Code is 4 Digits.

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

MATERIALS MANAGEMENT MAINTAIN PURCHASING ORGANZATION

(CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

45 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CALENDAR

HR Consultant is responsible to define Calendar.

The T-CODE to create Calendar is SCAL.

CREATING FIXED HOLIDAY

ENTER THE T CODE – SCAL

SELECT PUBLIC HOLIDAYS

CLICK ON CHANGE

CLICK ON CREATE (CTRL + F1)

SELECT WITH FIXED DATE

46 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CLICK ON CREATE (ENTER)

MENTION THE DETAILS

CLICK ON CREATE (ENTER)

CLICK ON CONTINUE (ENTER)

47 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FLOATING PUBLIC HOLIDAY

ENTER THE T-CODE SCAL

SELECT PUBLIC HOLIDAYS

CLICK ON CHANGE

SELECT FLOATING PUBLIC HOLIDAY

CLICK ON CREATE (ENTER)

ENTER THE DETAILS

PRESS ENTER + ENTER

48 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATING HOLIDAY CALENDAR

ENTER THE T-CODE SCAL

SELECT HOLIDAY CALENDAR

CLICK ON CHANGE

CLICK ON CREATE

ENTER THE CALENDAR ID

GIVE THE NAME FOR THE CALENDAR

CLICK ON ASSIGN HOLIDAY

SAERCH FOR CALENDER (CTRL + F)

MENTION CALENDAR ID

CLICK ON THE CALENDAR ID

49 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SELECT THE HOLIDAYS

CLICK ON ASSIGN PUBLIC HOLIDAY

CLICK ON SAVE

CLICK ON YES ON THE DIALOGUE BOX

50 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FACTORY CALENDAR

ENTER THE T-CODE SCAL

SELECT FACTORY CALENDAR

CLICK ON CHANGE

CLICK ON CREATE

GIVE THE ID & NAME

MENTION THE [Link] ID ([Link])

SELECT THE WORKING DAYS

51 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CLICK ON SAVE

CLICK ON CONTINUE

52 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ASSIGN FACTORY CALENDAR IN SALES ORGANIZATION, PLANT AND SHIPPING POINT

GO to SALES ORGANIZATION and Assign Calendar.

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

SALES & DISTRIBUTION DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK SALES ORGANIZATION

(CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE SALES

ORGANIZATION

CLICK ON POSITION

AND ENTER SALES ORGANIZATION CODE

SELECT THE SALES ORGANIZATION

GO TO DETAILS

53 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MENTION CALENDAR ID (SALES [Link])

SAVE IT

GO TO PLANT and Assign Calendar

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

LOGISTICS GENERAL DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK PLANT

(CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE PLANT

CLICK ON POSITION AND ENTER THE PLANT CODE

SELECT THE PLANT

GO TO DETAILS

MENTION CALENDAR ID (FACTORY CALENDAR)

SAVE IT

54 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go to SHIPPING POINT and Assign Calendar

PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION

LOGISTICS EXECUTION DEFINE, COPY, DELETE, CHECK SHIPPIN POINT

(CLICK ON CLOCK SYMBOL)

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE SHIPPING POINT

CLICK ON POSITION AND ENTER THE SHIPPING POINT

CODE

SELECT THE SHIPPING POINT

GO TO DETAILS

MENTION CALENDAR ID (FACTORY CALENDAR)

SAVE IT

55 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE

1. What is Distribution Channel?

The way of selling the goods to End customer or the way of distributing the goods to End customer.

2. What is Company Code?

It is an organization unit which is responsible for all-external financial transactions which happens in
the company.
External financial transactions are Balance sheet, Profit & Loss Statement.

3. What is Sales Line?

The combination of Sales organization and Distribution channel is called as Sales Line.

4. What is Sales Area?

It is a Combination of Sales Organization, Distribution Channel and Division.

5. What is Storage Location?

It is a Physical location where we store the finished goods within a Plant.

6. What is Shipping Point?

It is a Physical Location where we do the process of loading the goods.

7. What is Depot?
It is a physical location where we store the finished goods for easy distribution of goods to the
customers. Maintained by the Company.

8. What is C&F?
It is a physical location where we store the finished goods for easy distribution of goods to the
customers. Maintained by 3rd party person.

9. What is Division?
Range of Products or Product Line

10. What is the Relationship between Company Code and Sales Organization?
One to Many

11. What is the relationship between Sales Organization and Distribution Channel?
Many to Many

12. What is the relationship between Sales organization and Division?

Many to Many

13. What is the relationship between Company Code and Plant?

One to Many

14. What is the relationship between Plant and Shipping Point?

Many to Many

15. What is the T-Code to see the total Enterprise Structure

EC01

56 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MASTER DATA

Master Data: The Data which is stored centrally and used in Day-to-Day transactions wherever it is
required.

Master Data is the Data which cannot be changed frequently.

CUSTOMER

Customer is the person who will purchase the goods from the company.

In our project our customers are Dealers, Distributors, Hospitals (Institutions) etc.

100551 (SYSTEM GENERATED NUMBER AFTER SAVING THE BELOW DETAILS)

APOLLO HOSPITALS (CUSTOMER MASTER)

Name
Address
Communication
Bank Information
Terms & Conditions etc.

(After entering the details, System will generate

the Customer number/Code, every time
Customer places the order, we will use the same
Customer number/Code)

Advantages of Master Data

1. It will save the time of End users.

2. It will avoid manual mistakes.

End User is responsible to create MASTER DATA (End user is the Employee of client who will use SAP)

Functional Consultants role in Master Data

1. We give training to Users on creating master data.

2. We define new information in Master Data fields.

57 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

In SAP SD we have 4 types of MASTER DATA

1. CUSTOMER MASTER
2. MATERIAL MASTER
3. CUSTOMER MATERIAL INFO RECORD (CMIR)
4. CONDITION MASTER

CUSTOMER MASTER

It is the Data of the Customer which is stored centrally and used in Day-to-Day transactions
wherever it is required.

Example:

Name
Address
Communication
Bank Information
Payment Card Information
GST Information
Terms & Conditions etc.

End User is responsible to create Customer Master.

Functional Consultant’s role in Customer Master

1. We give training to Users on Creating Customer Master.

2. We define new information in Customer Master fields.

Customer Master classifies into 3 SCREENS

1. GENERAL DATA 2. COMPANY CODE DATA 3. SALES AREA DATA

7 TAB PAGES 4 TAB PAGES 4 TAB PAGES

1. ADDRESS 1. ACCOUNT MANAGEMENT 1. SALES

2. CONTROL DATA 2. PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS 2. SHIPPING
3. PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS 3. CORRSPONDENSE 3. BILLING DOCUMENT
4. MARKETING 4. INSURANCE 4. PARTNER FUNCTIONS
5. UNLOADING POINTS
6. EXPORT DATA
7. CONTACT PERSON

58 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

General Data further classifies into 7 Tab pages (SD USER IS RESPONSIBLE)

GENERAL DATA

1. ADDRESS
2. CONTROL DATA
3. PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS
4. MARKETING
5. UNLOADING POINTS
6. EXPORT DATA
7. CONTACT PERSON

Company Code Data further classifies into 4 Tab Pages (FI USER IS RESPONSIBLE)

COMPANY CODE

1. ACCOUNT MANAGEMENTMENT
2. PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS
3. CURRESPONDENSE
4. INSURANCE

Sales Area Data further classifies into 4 Tab Pages (SD USER IS RESPONSIBLE)

SALES AREA DATA

1. SALES
2. SHIPPING
3. BILLING DOCUMENT
4. PARTNER FUNCTIONS

In real time Client will give authorization to either One User or Two Users to create Customer
Master.

If One User is responsible to create Customer Master, then he will get Training on General Data,
Company Code Data and Sales Area Data.

General Data and Sales Area Data Training will be given by SD Consultant and Company Code Data
Training will be given by FI Consultant.

If Two Users are responsible to create Customer Master, then One User will be from Sales
Department. Another User will be from Finance department.

SD User will get Training on General Data and Sales Area Data.

FI User will get Training on Company Code Data.

59 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE CUSTOMER MASTER

T-CODES TO CREATE CUSTOMER MASTER

COMPLETE SALES VIEW COMPANY CODE VIEW

CREATE XD01 VD01 FD01

CHANGE XD02 VD02 FD02

DISPLAY XD03 VD03 FD03

PATH TO CREATE CUSTOMER MASTER

SAP EASY ACCESS LOGISTICS SALES & DISTRIBUTION

MASTER DATA BUSINESS PARTNER CUSTOMER CREATE

XD01-COMPLETE

(If we want to display the T-Codes on Easy Access)

Go to Extras Settings Click on Display Technical Names

(OR)

GO TO THE T-CODE XD01

CLICK ON ENTER

CLICK ON ACCOUNT GROUP OVER VIEW

SELECT 0001

DOUBLE CLICK ON 0001 ACCOUNT GROUP

60 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CUSTOMER NUMBER WE HAVE 2

OPTIONS

INTERNAL NUMBER – EXTERNAL BOX IS

UNCHECKED – SYSTEM WILL GENERATE
THE NUMBER

EXTERNAL NUMBER – EXTERNAL BOX IS

CHECKED - USER HAVE TO GIVE THE
NUMBER MANUALLY

(NUMBER SHOULD BE BETWEEN LOWER

LIMIT AND UPPER LIMIT)

FOR INTERNAL NUMBER LEAVE THE CUSTOMER

FIELD BLANK

MENTION THE COMPANY CODE

MENTION

SALES ORGANIZATION

DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

DIVISION

PRESS ENTER

WHEN YOU PRESS ENTER, WE MAY GET ERROR MESSAGE

“SALES AREA IS NOT DEFINED FOR CUSTOMERS”

TO SOLVE THIS ERROR

GO TO THE PATH

SPRO SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

DEFINE COMMON DISTRIBUTION CHANNELS

GO TO THE SALES ORGANIZATION &

DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL

(CLICK ON POSITION AN ENETER THE SALES

ORGANIZATION CODE)

MENTION THE SAME DISTRIBUTION

CHANNEL CODE IN BOTH THE FIELDS

PRESS ENTER

SAVE IT

GO BACK

61 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEFINE COMMON DIVISIONS

GO TO SALES ORGANIZATION AND DIVISION

MENTION THE SAME DIVISION CODE IN BOTH

THE FIELDS

PRESS ENTER

SAVE IT

GENERAL DATA SCREEN

ADDRESS TAB

MENTION

NAME (CUSTOMER NAME)

SEARCH TERM

STREET/HOUSE NUMBER

POSTAL CODE

CITY

COUNTRY – IN

REGION

TRANSPORTATION ZONE – 0000000001 (PRESS F4 TO FIND OUT)

62 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

GO TO COMPNAY CODE DATA

WHEN WE ARE CREATING CUSTOMER FOR THE

FIRST TIME SYSTEM WILL NOT DISPLAY THE
OPTIONS IN RE CONCILIATION ACCOUNT. TO
GET OPTIONS IN RE-CONCILIATION ACCOUNT
WE HAVE TO DO THE BELOW 2 STEPS

(FI CONSULTANT IS RESPONSIBLE)

STEP 1

GO TO THE T-CODE OBY6

CLICK ON POSITION

SEARCH FOR THE COMPANY CODE

CLICK ENTER

SELECT THE COMPANY CODE

GO TO DETAILS (F2)

MENTION

CHART OF ACCTS - INT

FISCAL YEAR VARIANT - V3

Fiscal Year Variant specifies the financial year of the Company.

INDIAN CLIENT FINANCIAL YEAR

FISCAL YEAR VARIANT V3 APRIL TO MARCH

FISCAL YEAR VARIANT FOREIGN CLIENT FINANCIAL YEAR

K4 JAN TO DEC
63 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FIELD STATUS VARIANT - 1000

POSTING PERIOD VARIANT - 1000

SAVE IT

STEP 2

GO TO THE T-CODE OBY2

MENTION

COMPANY CODE - H100

COPY FROM COMPANY CODE - 1000

UNCHECK TEST RUN

EXECUTE (F8)

WHEN WE CLICK ON EXECUTE, WE

WILL GET A MESSAGE

“You are making a production run”

PRESS ENTER

CLICK ON CONTINUE

64 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

GO TO THE T-CDODE XD01

CLICK ON ACCOUNT GROUP OVER VIEW

CLICK ON 0001

MENTION

CUSTOMER - BLANK
COMPANY CODE - H100
SALES ORGANIZATION -
DISTR. CHANNEL -
DIVISION -
REMOVE THE REFERENCE CODE 1000
PRESS ENTER

MENTION

NAME
SEARCH TERM
STREET
HOUSE NUMBER
POSTAL CODE
CITY
COUNTRY
TRANSPORTATION ZONE

GO TO COMPANY CODE DATA

MENTION RECONCILIATION ACCOUNT

SELECT 140000 (GL NUMBER)

GO TO SALES AREA DATA

GO TO SHIPPING TAB
MENITON
SHIPPING CONDITION - 01
DELIVERING PLANT - H100

GO TO BILLING DOCUMENTS TAB

MENTION
INCOTERMS - CIF HYDERABAD
TERMS OF PAYMENT - 0001
ACCT ASSIGNEMNT GROUP - 01
TAX CLASSIFICATION - 1
SAVE IT

(SYSTEM WILL GENERATE THE CUSTOMER NUMBER)

VCUST IS THE T-CODE FOR KNOWNING THE CUSTOMER NUMBER.

65 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FIELDS IN CUSTOMER MASTER

Change Mode of Customer XD02

Mention

Customer Number

Company Code

Sales Area

Sales Organization

Distribution Channel

Division

Enter

GENERAL DATA TABS

ADDRESS TAB

Search Term : It is the shortcut key to search the Customer information

Region : In SAP Region means State

Transportation Zone : This field is one of the parameters to determine ROUTE into
Sales Document

SALES DOCUMENT

ROUTE

ROUTE is the way of delivering the goods to Customers.

Example for Sales Document is Enquiry, Quotation, Sales

Order etc.

Communication : Here we maintain Customer Telephone number, Fax Email

ID etc.

66 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONTROL DATA TAB

Here we maintain Tax related information of the Customer.

In Tax Number 3 field we will maintain Customers GST registration number.

Tax Number 3

PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS

Here we maintain Customers Bank information and Card information.

FI Consultant is responsible for providing the Card details.

MARKETING

Nielsen ID : Nielsen ID specifies Market Survey Regions

Whenever client is launching new products into market, they do market survey in specific regions
and that will be defined as Nielsen ID in SAP.

SD Consultant is responsible to create Nielson ID.

Length of the Nielsen ID is 2 Digits

ALKEM INDIA

H1
GUJ H3
1500 ODISSA
H2 2500
KERALA
1500 2000

Nielson ID will help to track the customers who are located in Market survey regions.

Whenever client is doing market survey, then with the help of Nielsen ID we track all the customers
who are located in Market survey regions and samples to those customers.
67 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PATH TO DEFINE NIELSEN ID

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

BUSINESS PARTNERS CUSTOMERS MARKETING DEFINE NIELSEN ID

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

QUESTIONS

Q. What is Nielson ID?

Nielsen ID specifies Market survey regions

Q. What is the purpose of Nielson ID?

It will help to track the customers who are located in market survey regions.

68 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SHORT CUT METHOD TO DEFINE CUSTOMER MASTER FIELDS

The shortcut method to define the fields in Customer Master

Place the cursor in the field

Press F1

Click on customizing

Click on Continue without specifying project

System will take us directly to the Nielsen ID path

69 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: IF WE ARE NOT GETTING TAX CLASSIFICATION FIELD IN CUSTOMER MASTER

T-CODE: OVK1

PRESS ENTER

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

TAX COUNTRY : IN

SEQUENCE : 1

TAX CATEG. : MWST

SAVE

70 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Customer Classification: (Under General Data – Marketing Tab)

This will help to classify the customers based on their Sales turnover.

The purpose of Customer classification is

1. Reporting or Analysis
2. Discounts

Example:

H1 : 10 Crores and above : 7% Discount

H2 : 7 Crores and above : 5% Discount

H3 : 5 Crores and above : 3% Discount

H4 : 3 Crores and above : 1% Discount

H5 : 1 Crore and above : No Discount

Define Customer Classification in SAP:

SD Consultant is responsible for responsible for defining Customer Classification.

PATH TO DEFINE CUSTOMER CLASSIFICATION

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

BUSINESS PARTNERS CUSTOMERS MARKETING

DEFINE CUSTOMER CLASSIFICATION GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION

Customer Classifi. Ddescription

H1 10 CRORES AND ABOVE
H2 7 CRORES AND ABOVE
H3 5 CRORES AND ABOVE
H4 3 CRORES AND ABOVE
H5 1 CRORE AND ABOVE

CLICK ON SAVE

GO TO CUSTOMER MASTER

MENTION CUSTOMER (PRESS F4 TO SEARCH)

71 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Industry: (Under General Data – Marketing Tab - Classification)

Classifying the Customers based on the industry they belong to

The purpose of Industry is

1. Reporting or Analysis
2. Discounts

TOTAL INDUSTRY: 2000 CUSTOMERS

AUTOMOBILE PHARMA
INDUSTRY (700) INDUSTRY (600)

CEMENT CHEMICAL
INDUSTRY (500) INDUSTRY (200)

PATH TO DEFINE INDUSTRY

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

BUSINESS PARTNERS CUSTOMERS MARKETING

DEFINE INDUSTRY SECTOR FOR CUSTOMERS GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION

H001 : AUTOMOBILE INDUSTRY

CLICK ON SAVE

Industry Code 1: (Under General Data – Marketing Tab - Classification)

It is a sub classification of Industry

Annual Sales: (Under General Data – Marketing Tab – Key Figures)

Here we maintain last year sales of the customer for comparison purpose.

The purpose of annual sales is for comparison.

Regional Market: (Under General Data – Marketing Tab - Classification)

This field will help to classify the customers location into ‘A’ Class, ‘B’ Class, ‘C’ Class Market.

Regional Market is a Manual field.

72 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

In Regional Market User has to enter manually either ‘A’/’B’/’C’

Unloading Points: (Under General Data – Unloading Points)

Unloading point is the physical location where we unload the goods at Customers place.

Unloading point will help to plant the delivery.

Customer : 100659 : Balaji Enterprises

Kukatpally

Kukatpally Unloading point Pathancheru Unloading Point

CITY LIMITS OUTSIDE CITY LIMITS

10 PM TO 6 AM 24 X 7

10 PM

12 HRS 12 HRS

H100 - MUMBAI PLANT (NO PLANNING IS REQUIRED)

CITY LIMITS

(PLANNING) 10:00 AM 10 PM TO 6 AM

73 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

In Unloading points, we have to maintain Customer Calendar and Goods receiving hours.

CREATE CUSTOMER CALENDAR

T-CODE : SCAL

SELECT FACTORY CALENDAR

CLICK ON CHANGE

CLICK ON CREATE

MENTION CALENDAR ID : H2 TELANGANA CUSTOMER CALENDAR

MENTION THE HOLIDAY CALENDAR ID

CHECK WORKING DAYS

SAVE IT

PATH TO MAINTAIN GOODS RECEIVING HOURS

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

BUSINESS PARTNERS CUSTOMERS SHIPPING

DEFINE GOODS RECEIVING HOURS GO TO NEW ENTRIES

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

GOODS RECEIVING HOURS : H01

DESCRIPTION : CITY LIMITS 10 PM TO 6 AM

MENTION THE TIMINGS

SAVE IT

74 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SELECT KUKATPALLY UNLOADING POINT AND CLICK ON GOODS RECEIVING HOURS

ENTER

CLICK ON CONTINUE

Q. Clients requirement is for some customer they want to deliver the goods only on Thursdays,
where is the Control?

Ans: In Customer Calendar check only Thursday as working.

Export Data: (Under General Data – Export Data Tab)

If Customer is located outside the country, then we maintain export data.

Contact Person:

Contact person is employee of

customer responsible for various
activities.

Mention

NAME
DESIGNATION
DEPARTMENT
HOME ADDRESS
VISITING HOURS
THE T-CODE TO CREATE CONTACT PERSON IS
VAP1

MENTION THE CUSTOMER NUMBER & PRESS ENTER

75 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

COMPANY CODE DATA TABS

Account Management Tab:

Reconciliation Account

It is a GL account which will help to cumulate the total outstanding of the customers.

ORDER

RECONCILIATION A/C

DELIVERY 140000

INVOICE

ACCOUNTING DOCUMENT

CUSTOMER A/C DR

TO REVENUE A/C CR

When we create Invoice system generates accounting document and the accounting entry is

Customer a/c Dr PRICE 100000

To Revenue a/c Cr DIS -12000

SUR 4000 (Transportation Charges)

DUE 92000

For the Customer a/c system determines GL account from Reconciliation a/c

Payment Transaction Tab: (Under Company Code Data – Payment Transactions Tab)

Terms of Payment:

It is an agreement between the company and the customer for the number of days given to

make the payment. We also call it as credit period.

Payment History Record:

If we check this, then whenever customer make the payment that data will be automatically

updated into credit management.

76 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SALES AREA DATA TABS

Sales District: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

It is a sub classification of Sales Office for the purpose of generating Sales reports.

If Management is asking for Sales/ reports below to Sales office level, then that will be
defined as Sales District.

The length of the Code is 6 Digits.

H100 SALES OFFICE

TELANGANA SALES OFFICE

NORTH TELANGANA

SOUTH TELANGANA

EAST TELANGANA

WEST TELANGANA

PATH TO DEFINE SALES DISTRICTS

SPRO → SAP REF IMG → SALES AND DISTRIBUTION → MASTER DATA → BUSINESS
PARTNERS → CUSTOMERS → SALES → DEFINE SALES DISTRICTS

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

Sales District District Name

H00001 NORTH TELANGANA
H00002 SOUTH TELANGANA
H00003 EAST TELANGANA
H00004 WEST TELANGANA

CLICK ON SAVE

Sales Office: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

It is a physical location where group of people work together to perform sales.

Sales Group: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

Group of people within a sales office but working for different activities.

77 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Customer Group: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

Grouping of the Customers who will share the same attributes.

In our scenario the attribute is Volume of Business.

DEALERS DISTRIBUTORS INSTITUTIONS

H1 BULK DEALERS G1 BULK DISTRIBUTORS I1 BULK INSTITUTIONS

H2 MEDIUM DEALERS G2 MEDIUM DISTRIBUTOR I2 MEDIUM INSTIUTIONS

H3 LOW DEALERS G3 LOW DISTRIBUTORS I3 LOW INSTITUTIONS

PATH TO DEFINE CUSTOMER GROUPS

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

BUSINESS PARTNERS CUSTOMERS SALES

DEFINE CUSTOMER GROUPS GO TO NEW ENTRIES

CGrp Name
H1 BULK DEALRS
H2 MEDIUM DEALERS
H3 LOW DEALERS
G1 BULK DISTRIBUTORS
G2 MEDIUM DISTRIBUTORS
G3 LOW DISTRIBUTORS
I1 BULK INSTITUTIONS
I2 MEDIUM INSTITUTIONS
I3 LOW INSTITUTIONS

CLICK ON SAVE

ABC Class: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

Classifying the Customers into A Class, B Class and C Class by considering Volume of

Business, Turnover, Behavior, Payment History.

The purpose of ABC Class is giving priority to customers.

ABC Class is a manual field which user has to enter manually either A/B/C.

78 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Currency: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

If Customer if located outside the country, then we maintain here Customer currency.

COMPANY CODE INR

CUSTOMER CURRENCY USD SALES ORDER

20000 USD

DELIVERY

20000 USD

INVOICE

20000 USD

ACCOUNTING DOCUMENT
EXCHANGE RATE
26.11.2021 72 INR

[Link] CURRENCY

14,40,000 INR

If Customer Currency and Company code Currency is different, then while creating Sales

order, Delivery, and Invoice System will display the values in Customer Currency. But System

is generating accounting document then System converts the values from Customer

Currency to Company Code Currency based on exchange rates.

The T-CODE to maintain Exchange Rate is OC41

FI User (End User) is responsible to maintain exchange rates.

T-CODE : OC41

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

ExRt Valid From [Link] X Ratio From = [Link] X Ratio (to) To

M 26.11.2021 X USD = 72 X 1 INR
X = X
X = X
X = X
X = X

ENTER AND SAVE

The standard exchange rate type is M.

79 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Switch of rounding: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

If we check this, then System will not perform rounding on quantity decimals.

Rounding means converting the decimal to the nearest number.

Order Probability: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

This field controls after placing the order what is the chance that customer will stick to that

Order.

Purpose of order probability is it will help to take multiple confirmations from the customer

Before delivery.

It is a manual field.

Item Proposal: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

Listing of the materials which customer regular orders and calling that list while creating

sales order.

The purpose of Item proposal is it will save the time of end users.

The T-Code to item proposal VA51

Exchange Rate Type: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

If we have agreement with customer to have a fixed exchange rate which will be valid

throughout the month, then we have to maintain exchange rate for different exchange rate

type other than ‘M’. E.g., ‘B’. Maintain that exchange rate type in Customer Master.

PP Customer Procedure: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

This field controls whether to go for PRODUCT PROPOSAL or CROSS SELLING.

Product Proposal : It means automatic process of determining item proposal.

Cross Selling : It means selling additional products along with the main products.

‘A’ means Product proposal

‘B’ means Cross selling

Price Group: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

Grouping of the customer s who will share the same pricing attributes.

Price group will help to maintain discounts.

Price group will help to simplify the maintenance of discounts.

80 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PATH TO DEFINE PRICE GROUP

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION BASIC FUNCTIONS

PRICING MAINTAIN PRICE RELAVENT MASTER DATA FIELDS

DOUBLE CLIK ON DEFINE PRICING GROUPS FOR CUSTOMERS

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

ENTER THE FIELDS

Price Grp Description

H1 GROUP 1
H2 GROUP 2
H3 GROUP 3
H4 GROUP 4
SAVE IT

Customer Pricing procedure: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

This field is one of the parameters to determine pricing procedure in sales document.

Price List: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab)

Price list means grouping of the customers who will share the same base price.

Price list will help to maintain base price.

Pricelist will help to maintain simplify the maintenance of Base price.

Generally, we have 3 Price lists.

[Link] Price List

2. Distributor Price List

3. Institution Price List

PATH TO DEFINE PRICE LIST

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION BASIC FUNCTIONS

PRICING MAINTAIN PRICE RELAVENT MASTER DATA FIELDS

DOUBLE CLIK ON DEFINE PRICE LIST CATOGORIES

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION THE FIELDS

PL Description
H1 DEALER PRICE LIST
H2 DISTRIBUTOR PRICE LI
H3 INSTITUTION PRICE LI

SAVE
81 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Customer Statistics Group: (Under Sales Area Data – Sales Tab - Pricing)

This field controls whether to update Customer sales data into LIS reports or not.

LIS (LOGISTICS INFORMATION SYSTEM) is a management reporting tool.

Order Combination: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab - Shipping)

If we check this then system will allow to combine multiple orders into single delivery, if we
uncheck this then system will not allow to combine orders into single delivery.

Shipping Conditions: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab - Shipping)

This field is one of the parameters to determine shipping point into sales document.

The T-Code for Shipping point determination is OVL2

Delivering Plant: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab - Shipping)

If we maintain plant here, then this plant would be determined into Sales document.

The criteria to determine plant into sales document

CMIR (Customer Material Info Record), Customer Master, Material Master

82 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Delivery Priority: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab - Shipping)

This field will help to classify the customers into

High Delivery Priority

Medium Delivery Priority

Low Delivery Priority

The purpose of delivery priority is it will help to process Backorder processing and Re-
Scheduling.

BACK-ORDER PROCESSING:

Whenever High-Delivery priority Customer places order and if stock is not available,

then we go back to the open orders of Low Delivery Priority Customers, Cancel the

confirmations and assign it to High Delivery Priority Customer’s Order.

Open Order means received but not yet delivered.

STOCK
X 100

ORDER ORDER ORDER

CUSTOMER 100554 CUSTOMER 100553 CUSTOMER 100551
[Link] 03 LOW [Link] 03 LOW [Link] 01 HIGH
PRODUCT QTY PRODUCT QTY PRODUCT QTY
X 60 ✓
X 40 ✓ X 40 ✓
ORDER CONFIRMED INITIALLY ORDER CONFIRMED AFTER
ORDER CONFIRMED BUT REJCTED DUE TO HIGH REJECTING THE LOW PRIORITY
PRIORITY CUSTOMER ORDER CUSTOMER ORDER

RE-SCHEDULING:

Automatic process of doing backorders.

Delivery Priority

01 – High Delivery Priority

02 – Normal Delivery Priority

03 – Low Delivery Priority

83 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Relevant for POD: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab - Shipping)

POD (Proof of Delivery) (Acknowledgement)

If we check this, then system will not allow to create invoice until we receive
acknowledgement from the customer.
(POD TIME FRAME)
1. ORDER (100 QTY) 2. DELIVERY (100 QTY) 4. INVOICE

3. ACKNOWKLEDGEMENT (VLPOD)

POD timeframe: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab - Shipping)

If we mention no. of days here and if customer fails to send the acknowledgement within

the no. of days then system will allow to create Invoice without acknowledgement.

Complete delivery required: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab – Partial deliveries)

If we check this, then system will not allow to confirm partial quantities and system will not

allow to do partial deliveries.

Generally, all government customers will check complete delivery requirement.

STOCK
X 100

COMPLETE DELIVERY REQUIRED ✓ COMPLETE DELIVERY REQUIRED

ORDER ORDER
X 160 QTY X 160 QTY
CONFIRM CONFIRM
30.11.2021 100 QTY
15.12.2021 60 QTY 15.12.2021 160 QTY

Partial delivery per Item: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab – Partial deliveries)

This will control whether to allow partial deliveries or not and it also controls how many

maximum partial deliveries to be allowed.

BLANK means maximum 9 partial deliveries.

‘D’ means unlimited partial deliveries.

‘C’ means complete delivery.

84 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. How many maximum partial delivery systems will allow?

Ans. It depends on partial delivery per item.

If it is Blank maximum 9 partial deliveries

If it is ‘C’ complete delivery

If it is ‘D’ unlimited partial deliveries.

Unlimited tolerance: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab – Partial deliveries)

If we check unlimited tolerance then system will allow to increase or decrease the quantities
in delivery document without any limitation.

Under delivery Tolerance: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab – Partial deliveries)

If we maintain some percentage here then system will allow to decrease the quantities in
delivery document up to that percentage. If the percentage exceeds then system will give
warning message.

ORDER (100 QTY)

DELIVERY (70 QTY)

WARNING MESSAGE / ERROR MESSAGE

Over delivery Tolerance: (Under Sales Area Data – Shipping Tab – Partial deliveries)

If we maintain some percentage system will allow to increase the quantities in delivery
document up to that percentage. If the percentage exceeds then system will give warning
message.

ORDER (100 QTY)

DELIVERY (130 QTY)

WARNING MESSAGE / ERROR MESSAGE

85 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Rebate: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Billing document)

Rebate is special kind of discount and it’s a conditional discount, which will be valid over a
specific period of time.

Example:

If Customer purchased X material Qty: 50,000 from Jan 1st to Dec 31st, then he is eligible for a
rebate of 10%.

Invoicing dates: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Billing document)

If customers requirement is invoice to be raised only on a specific date of every month for all
the dispatches made during that particular month. Then we use invoicing dates.

01.11.2021 10.11.2021 15.11.2021

ORDER ORDER ORDER

100 QTY 300 QTY 500 QTY

DELIVERY DELIVERY DELIVERY

100 QTY 300 QTY 500 QTY

30.11.2021 30.11.2021 30.11.2021

INVOICE INVOICE INVOICE

100 QTY 300 QTY 500 QTY

86 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Configuration for Invoicing dates:

CREATE CALENDAR (T CODE – SCAL)

SELECT FACTORY CALENDAR

CLICK ON CHANGE

CLICK ON CREATE

MENTION THE CALENDAR ID

UNCHECK ALL WORKING DAYS

SAVE IT

CONTINUE

87 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

GO TO SPECIAL RULES

CLICK ON CREATE (SHIFT + F1)

MENTION THE DATES

CHECK WORKDAY

MENTION THE DESCRIPTION IN TEXT FIELD

ENTER

SAVE

88 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

GO TO CUSTOMER MASTER

BILLING TAB

AND MAINTAIN THE CALENDAR IN INVOICING DATES

Partner Functions: (Under Sales Area Data – Partner Functions Tab)

In SAP the customers are classified in to 4 partner functions

1. SP (Sold to Party)
2. SH (Ship to Party)
3. PY (Payer)
4. BP (Bill to Party)

APOLLO JUBILEEHILLS (MAIN BRANCH) ORDER

SP SOLD TO PARTY

SH SHIP TO PARTY

PY PAYER

BP BILL TO PARTY

APOLLO VIJAYAWADA APOLLO VIZAG APOLLO BHUBANESHWAR

SH SHIP TO PARTY SH SHIP TO PARTY SH SHIP TO PARTY

BP BILL TO PARTY BP BILL TO PARTY BP BILL TO PARTY

SP (Sold to Party): Sold to Party is the customer who will place the order.

SH (Ship to Party): Ship to party is the customer who will receive the goods.

PY (Payer): Payer is the customer who will make the payment.

BP (Bill to Party): Bill to Party is the customer who will receive the invoice.

89 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Invoice List:

Consolidating multiple invoices into one and sending into payer.

Invoicing List Dates: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Billing document)

This field controls on which date system should allow to consolidate multiple invoices into one.

The configuration list dates are same like Invoicing dates.

APOLLO JUBILEEHILLS (MAIN BRANCH) 10 ORDERS

SP SOLD TO PARTY

SH SHIP TO PARTY INV 1

PY PAYER INV 2

BP BILL TO PARTY INV 3

APOLLO VIJAYAWADA APOLLO VIZAG APOLLO BHUBANESHWAR

SH SHIP TO PARTY SH SHIP TO PARTY SH SHIP TO PARTY

BP BILL TO PARTY BP BILL TO PARTY BP BILL TO PARTY

INV 4 INV 6 INV 9

INV 5 INV 7 INV 10

INV 8

The T-Code to create invoice list is VF24

Incoterms: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Delivery and payment terms)

Incoterms is international commercial terms which is an agreement between Shipper and the
Receiver for the successful completion of deliveries.

Incoterms specifies who is responsible for transportation charges, Insurance, Cost etc. i.e., Customer
or Company.

90 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Terms of Payment: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Delivery and payment terms)

It is an agreement between Company and the Customer for the no. of days given to make the
payment. We also call it as Credit period.

PATH TO DEFINE TERMS OF PAYMENT

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

BUSINESS PARTNERS CUSTOMERS BILLING DOCUMENTS

DEFINE TERMS OF PAYMENT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

Baseline Date:

It is a date from which system starts calculating credit period

TERMS OF PAYMENT IS 30 DAYS

DATE

ORDER 01.1.2021

DELIVERY 25.11.2021

INVOICE 28.11.2021 BASE LINE DATE

28.12.2021 DUE DATE

91 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Fixed Day:

IF we maintain Fixed date then every month system will take fixed date as baseline date.
TERMS OF PAYMENT IS 30 DAYS FIXED DATE IS 25

DATE

ORDER 01.12.2021

DELIVERY 02.12.2021

INVOICE 02.12.2021 INVOICE DATE

25.12.2021 BASELINE DATE
24.01.2022 DUE DATE

Additional months:

If we maintain 1 then the base line date will be postponed by one month from the date of

Invoice.
TERMS OF PAYMENT IS 30 DAYS ADDITIONAL MONTH: 1 MONTH

DATE

ORDER 01.12.2021

DELIVERY 02.12.2021

INVOICE 02.12.2021 INVOICE DATE

1 MONTH
01.01.2021 BASELINE DATE
31.01.2022 DUE DATE

Cash discounts:

It is the discount which we offer to customers if customer is making payment well before due

date. The Cash discount which we maintain in terms of payment will be determined into sales

document with the help of

SALES ORDER

CONDITION TYPE

SKTO 2%

92 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Payment Guarantee procedure: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Delivery and
payment terms)

We maintain payment guarantee procedure for foreign customers. And we maintain payment
guarantee procedure as 0001.

If we maintain payment guarantee procedure then system will not allow to create delivery until we
receive payment guarantee from the customer.

ORDER

PAYMENT GUARANTEE

(LETTER OF CREDIT)

CUSTOMER

DELIVERY

Account assignment group: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Accounting)

This field is one of the parameters to determine revenue GL accounts while posting invoice values
into accounting.

When we create Invoice system generates accounting document and the accounting entry is

Customer a/c Dr
To Revenue a/c Cr

For the revenue account system determine GL account based on account assignment group.
ORDER

DELIVERY Account Assignment Group

(01/02)

INVOICE

ACCOUNTING DEPARTMENT

Customer a/c Dr.

To Revenue a/c Cr

We maintain account assignment group as 01 or 02.

01 means Domestic revenues.

02 means foreign revenues.

For Domestic customers we maintain account assignment group as 01.

And Foreign customers we maintain account assignment group as 02.

93 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Tax Classification: (Under Sales Area Data – Billing Documents Tab – Taxes)

This field controls whether the customer is liable for tax or not.

If the customer is liable for tax, then maintain tax classification as 1.

If the customer is not liable for tax, then maintain tax classification as 0.

EXTENDING THE CUSTOMERS TO OTHER DIVISIONS

T-Code: XD01

Account group 0001

Customer 100659

Company Code H100

Sales area

Sales organization H100

Distribution channel H1

Division H2

Reference

Customer 100659

Company Code H100

Sales Organization H100

Distribution Channel H1

Reference Division H1

Press Enter

If we extend the Customer to other Division, then System will allow to visit only Sales area data.

Visit all the areas for the cross verification.

Save it.

DO the same process for H2, H3, H4, H5 AND H6.

(Only Division number in Sales area need to be changed and mention the Customer number every
time we extend the new division, otherwise system will create a new customer ID)

94 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATING CUSTOMER SEPERATELY IN SALES VIEW AND COMPANY CODE VIEW

In some clients 2 users are responsible to create customer master, in that one user will be from Sales
department and another user will be from Finance department.

First Sales department user will create customer in Sales view (T-Code: VD01), then Sales user will
send the customer number to FI user, then FI user will create the customer in company code view
(T-Code: FD01).

Creating Customer in Sales view

T-CODE: VD01

CLICK ON ACCOUNT GROUP OVER VIEW

DOUBLE CLICK ON 0001 ACCOUNT GROUP

SALES AREA

Sales Organization : H100

Distribution Channel : H1

Division : H1

ENTER

If we create customer in VD01, then system will display only General data and Sales area data.

Enter the

GENERAL DATA

Name

Search term

Address

GO TO SALES AREA DATA

SHIPPING

Shipping Condition : 01

Delivering Plant : H100

BILLING DOCUMENTS

Incoterms : CIF HYDERABAD

Terms of Payment : H030

Account assign. group : 01

Tax classification :1

95 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

After creating the customer in Sales view, then SD user will send the customer number to FI user.

Then FI user will go to FD01

MENTION

ACCOUNT GROUP : 0001

CUSTOMER NUMBER : 100668

COMPANY CODE : H100

ENTER

PAYMENT TRANSACTIONS TAB

Reconciliation account : 140000

Payment terms : H030

SAVE IT

T-CODES IN CUSTOMER MASTER

XD01 : Create Customer

XD02 : Change Customer

XD03 : Display Customer

XD04 : Tracking the Changes in Customer master

XD05 : Blocking/Un Blocking the Customer

(If Customers are not making payments, then we block the customers. After making payment we will
unblock the customer)

XD06 : Customer flag for Deletion

(If Customer is not doing business with the company, then we flag the customer for deletion)

XD07 : Changing the customer from one account group to another.

96 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. Clients requirement is they want to restrict duplication of customer master, where is the
control?

Ans. Message number 145

PATH FOR MESSAGE NUMBER 145

SPRO SAP REF IMG LOGISTICS GENERAL BUSINESS PARTNER

CUSTOMERS CONTROL CHANGE MESSAGE CONTROL FOR CUSTOMER MASTER DATA

There are 5 types of messages used for Msg no of Customer master Data

1. E – Error
2. W – Warning
3. I – Note in Window
4. S – Note in Footer
5. “- “– Switch off message

97 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

1006 MAIN BRANCH ACC GROUP

APOLLO JUBILEEHILLS (SOLD TO PARTY) 0001

SP SOLD TO PARTY

SH SHIP TO PARTY

PY PAYER

BP BILL TO PARTY

SH 100674

SH 100676

BP 100675

BP 100677

100674 ACC GRP 100674 ACC GRP

APOLLO VIJAYAWADA (SHIP TO PARTY) 0002 APOLLO VIZAG (SHIP TO PARTY) 0002

SH SHIP TO PARTY SH SHIP TO PARTY

100675 100677

APOLLO VIJAYAWADA (BILL TO PARTY) 0004 APOLLO VIZAG (BILL TO PARTY) 0004

BP BILL TO PARTY BP BILL TO PARTY

98 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE SOLD TO PARTY

T-CODE: XD01

ACCOUNT GROUP : 0001

COMPANY CODE : H100
SALES ORGANIZATION : H100
DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL: H3 (INSTITUTIONS)

ENTER

GENERAL DATA

Name : APOLLO JUBILEE HILLS

SEARCH TERM : JUB
STREET/HOUSE NO : JUBILEEHILLS
CITY : HYDERABAD
COUNTRY : IN
TIME ZONE : INDIA
TRANSP. ZONE : 0000000001

COMPANY CODE DATA

RECON. ACC : 140000

SALES AREA DATA – SHIPPING TAB

SHIPPING COND : 01
DELIVERING PLANT : H100

SALES AREA DATA - BILLING DOCUMNETS

INCOTERMS : CIF HYD

TERMS OF PAYMENT : H030
ACCT ASSMNT GROUP : 01
TAX CLASSIFICATION :1

CHECK THE PARTNER FUNTIONS TAB

SAVE

99 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE SHIP TO PARTY

T-CODE: XD01

ACCOUNT GROUP : 0002

CUSTOMER : BLANK

ENTER

GENERAL DATA
NAME : APOLLO VIJAYAWA
SEARCH TERM : VIJ
TRANSP ZONE : 0000000001

COMPANY CODE DATA

RECON. ACC : 140000

SALES AREA DATA – SHIPPING TAB

SHIPPING : 01
DELIVERING PLANT : H100

SALES AREA DATA – BILLING DOCS

TAX CLASSIFICATION : 1

CHECK PARTNER FUNCTION TAB

SAVE

CREATE BILL TO PARTY

T-CODE: XD01
ACCOUNT GROUP : 0004
CUSTOMER : BLANK
ENTER

(SAME AS CREATE SHIP TO PARTY)

100 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

After creating all SHIP TO PARTIES and Bill to Parties, go to change mode of SOLD TO PARTY and add
SHIP TO PARTY and BILL TO PARTY.

Go to Change mode

T-CODE: XD02

MENTION THE SOLD TO PARTY NUMBER: 100673

ENTER

GO TO PARTNER FUNCTIONS TAB

MENTION

SH VIJAYAWADA

BP VIJAYAWADA

SH VIZAG

BP VIZAG

SAVE

101 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

APOLLO JUBILEE HILLS APOLLO VIJAYAWADA APOLLO VIZAG

(SOLD TO PARTY) (SHIP TO PARTY) (PAYER)

SALES TAB SHIPPING TAB BILLING TAB

Shipping Conditions Tax Classification

Incoterms

ORDER

SOLD TO PARTY APOLLO JUBILEE HILLS

SHIP TO PARTY APOLLO VIJAYAWADA

PAYER APOLLO VIZAG

Shipping conditions is in Shipping tab but it will copy from SOLD TO PARTY

Second field Incoterms is in Billing tab but it will copy from SOLD TO PARTY

Tax classification is in Billing tab but it will copy from SHIPPING TAB

102 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

COMMON DIVISIONS
If Client is having Hundreds of divisions, then instead of wasting the space of Database by creating
Customer in each and every Division we can create Customer only once with common division.
Which will save the space of database and the time of end user.

Configuration for Common Division:

STEP-1

Create Division in Enterprise Structure

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE DEFINITION LOGISTICS GENERAL

DEFINE, COPY, DELETE CHECK DIVISION DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE DIVISION

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTION H0 COMMON DIVISION

SAVE

STEP-2

Assign Division to Sales Organization

SPRO ENTERPRISE STRUCTURE ASSIGNMEENT SALES & DISTRIBITUON

ASSIGN DIVISION TO SALES ORGANISATION GO TO NEW ENTRIES

103 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SAVE

STEP-3

Define Common Division

SPRO SALES & DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA DEFINE COMMMON DIVISIONS

GO TO YOUR SALES ORGANIZATION & DIVISION (CLICK ON POSITION)

MENTION THE COMMON DIVISION

SAVE

STEP-4

Create Customer with Common Division

T-CODE: XD01

SAVE

After creating one customer with Common Division

GO BACK TO STEP-3 AND ASSIGN ACTUAL DIVISIONS AND SAVE

Q. Do we use Common Distribution concept for Customers?

Ans: No, because we don’t extend the customers from one distribution channel to another.

104 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

TABLES IN CUSTOMER MASTER

GENERAL DATA KNA1

COMPANY CODE DATA KNB1

SALES AREA DATA KNVV

PARTNER FUNCTIONS KNVP

TAX CLASSIFICATION KNVI

KNA1

The T-CODE to see the Table Data is SE16N

The T-CODE to see the List of Customers is VCUST

Maximum Length of Customer number is 10 Digits.

105 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN CUSTOMER MASTER

Q. What is the purpose of Transportation zone?

Ans. This field is one of the parameters to determine Route into Sales Document.

Q. Where we maintain Customer GST Registration number?

Ans. Tax no. 3 field, Control Data

Q. What is Nielsen ID and What is the purpose?

Ans. It specifies the Market survey regions, it will help to track the customers who are located in
market survey regions.

Q. What is Customer classification and What is the purpose of it?

Ans. Classifying the customers based on sales turnover and the purpose is Discounts, Reporting or
Analysis.

Q. What is Industry and Purpose?

Ans. Classifying the Customers based on Industry and the purpose is Discounts, Reporting or Analysis

Q. What do we maintain in annual sales and what is the purpose of it?

Ans. Here we maintain last year sales of the customer; we maintain last year sales for comparison.

Q. What is regional market and what is the purpose of it?

Ans. This will help to classify Customer location into A Class, B Class and C Class Market. Purpose is
Reporting and analysis.

Q. Clients requirement is for some customer they want to deliver the goods only on Saturdays,
where is the control?

Ans. In customer calendar check only Saturday as working.

Q. What is Re-Conciliation account and what is the purpose of it?

Ans. It is a GL account which will help to cumulate the total outstanding of the customers.

Q. What is Sales District?

Ans. It’s a sub classification of Sales office for the purpose of generating sales reports.

Q. What is Customer group and what is the purpose of it?

Ans. Grouping of the Customers who will share the same attributes.

Q. What is ABC class and what is the purpose of it?

Ans. Classifying the Customers into A Class, B Class and C Class by considering Volume of Business,
Turnover, Behavior, Payment History. The purpose of ABC Class is giving priority to customers.

106 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. What is probability field in Customer master?

Ans. This field controls after placing the order what is the chance that customer will stick to that
Order. Purpose of order probability is it will help to take multiple confirmations from the customer
before delivery. It is a manual field.

Q. What is the Item proposal and what is the purpose of it?

Ans. Listing of the materials which customer regular orders and calling that list while creating sales
order. The purpose of Item proposal is it will save the time of end users. The T-Code to item proposal
VA51.

Q. What is the purpose of customer pricing procedure?

Ans. This field is one of the parameters to determine pricing procedure in sales document.

Q. When we maintain exchange rate type in customer master?

Ans. If we have agreement with customer to have a fixed exchange rate which will be valid
throughout the month, then we have to maintain exchange rate for different exchange rate type
other than ‘M’. E.g., ‘B’. Maintain that exchange rate type in Customer Master.

The T-CODE to maintain Exchange Rate is OC41. FI User (End User) is responsible to maintain
exchange rates. The standard exchange rate type is M.

Q. What is the purpose of Shipping condition?

Ans. This field is one of the parameters to determine shipping point into sales document. The T-Code
for Shipping point determination is OVL2

Q. What is Delivery priority and what is its purpose?

Ans. This field will help to classify the customers into High Delivery Priority, Medium Delivery Priority,
Low Delivery Priority. The purpose of delivery priority is it will help to process Backorder processing
and Re-Scheduling.

Q. What is the criteria to determine Plant into Sales document?

Ans. 1. CMIR (Customer Material Info Record), 2. Customer Master, 3. Material Master.

Q. What happens if I check relevant for POD?

Ans. System will not allow to create invoice until we receive the acknowledgement from the
Customer.

Q. What is POD time frame?

Ans. If we mention no. of days here and if customer fails to send the acknowledgement within the no.
of days, then system will allow to create Invoice without acknowledgement.

Q. What happens is I check complete delivery required?

Ans. System will not allow to confirm partial quantities and system will not allow to do partial
deliveries.

107 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. How many numbers of partial deliveries we can do?

Ans. As per the Customer requirement.

BLANK means maximum 9 partial deliveries.

‘D’ means unlimited partial deliveries.

‘C’ means complete delivery.

Q. What happens if I check unlimited tolerance?

Ans. If we check unlimited tolerance then system will allow to increase or decrease the quantities in
delivery document without any limitation.

Q. What happens if we check Order combination?

Ans. If we check this then system will allow to combine multiple orders into single delivery, If we
uncheck this then system will not allow to combine into single delivery.

Q. What happens if we maintain Over delivery tolerance?

Ans. If we maintain Over delivery tolerance, System will allow to increase the quantities in delivery
document up to that percentage. If the percentage exceeds then system will give warning message.

Q. What happens if we maintain Under delivery tolerance?

Ans. If we maintain Under delivery tolerance, System will allow to decrease the quantities in delivery
document up to that percent. If the percentage exceeds system will give warning message.

Q. Clients requirement is for some customers they want to create invoice only on month end.

Ans. Invoicing date

Q. What happens if we maintain payment guarantee procedure?

Ans. If we maintain payment guarantee procedure then system will not allow to create delivery until
we receive payment guarantee from the customer.

Example: Letter of Credit

T-Code for Letter of Credit: VKM

Q. Clients requirement is for some customers, system should calculate credit period from every
month 25th. Where is the control?

Ans. Maintain fixed day in terms of payment.

Q. What is Baseline date?

Ans. It is the date from which system will

Q. How the cash discounts will be determined into Sales document?

Ans. SKTO Condition

108 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. What is the purpose of account assignment group?

Ans. This field is one of the parameters to determine revenue GL accounts while posting invoice
values into accounting.

We maintain account assignment group as 01 or 02. 01 means Domestic revenues,02 means foreign
revenues.

Q. What is Invoicing list?

Ans. Consolidating multiple invoices into one and sending into payer.

Q. What is the T-Code for Invoicing list?

Ans. VF24

Q. What is the account group for payer?

Ans. 0003

Q. What is the account group for Ship to Party?

Ans. 0002

Q. Who is Sold to party?

Ans. Sold to Party is the customer who will place the order.

Q. Who is Bill to party?

Ans. Bill to Party is the customer who will receive the invoice.

Q. Clients requirement is they want to restrict the duplication of Customer number? Where is the
control?

Ans. Message number 145

Q. What is table for Customer master General data?

Ans. KNA1

Q. What is the table for customer master partner functions?

Ans. KNVP

Q. What is table for Customer master Sales data?

Ans. KNVV

Q. Shipping conditions will be copied from which partner function?

Ans. SOLD TO PARTY

Q. Tax classification will copy from which partner function?

Ans. SHIP TO PARTY

109 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. Inco terms will copy from which partner function?

Ans. SOLD TO PARTY

Q. What is the purpose of common division?

Ans. It will help to save the space of Database by creating Customer in each and every Division we
can create Customer only once with common division. Which will save the space of database and the
time of end user.

Q. Do we use common distribution concept for customers?

Ans. No, because we don’t extend the customers from one distribution channel to another.

110 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CUSTOMER NUMBER RANGES

The T-CODE for Customer number ranges is XDN1

PATH FOR CUSTOMER NUMBER RANGES

SPRO SAP REF IMG LOGISTICS GENERAL BUSINESS PARTNER

CUSTOMERS CONTROL DEFINE AND ASSIGN CUSTOMER NUMBER RANGES

DOUBLE CLICK ON DEFINE NUMBER RANGES FOR CUSTOMER MASTER

CLICK ON CHANGE INTERVALS

TO SEE THE FREE INTERVAL (AVAILABLE NUMBER) GO TO INTERVAL AND CLICK ON FREE INTERVALS

CLICK ON INSERT LINE

111 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

No From No To Number NR Status Ext

H1 614000 614199 0

ENTER

While defining Number ranges, we have external check box; If we check external, then system will
treat it as external number and user has to give the number manually while creating customer
master.

If we uncheck external, then system will treat it as internal number and system will generate the
number when we save customer master.

When we save Number ranges system will not generate request number, because we don’t transport
the Number ranges from one server to another server.

No From No To Number NR Status Ext

H2 614200 614299 0

ENTER

No From No To Number NR Status Ext

H3 614300 614399 0

ENTER

No From No To Number NR Status Ext

H4 614400 614499 0

ENTER

Number ranges can be Numeric or Alpha numeric or characters.

Alpha numeric and Characters should be external.

Numeric can be External or Internal.

112 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. Where we can change the current number?

Ans. NR Status

Q. My Customer number is taking buffer, what could be the reason?

Ans. T-CODE: SNUM

113 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ACCOUNT GROUPS

The standard account group for SOLD TO PARTY is 0001.

The standard account group for SHIP TO PARTY is 0002.

The standard account group for PAYER is 0003.

The standard account group for BILL TO PARTY is 0004.

Purpose of Account group:

1. It controls the fields in customer master. That is whether to make the field mandatory or
optional or display or suppress.
2. It controls partner functions.
3. Its controls Number ranges.

The T-CODE to define Account group is OVT0

PATH TO DEFINE ACCOUNT GROUPS

SPRO SAP REF IMG LOGISTICS GENERAL BUSINESS PARTNER

CUSTOMERS CONTROL DEFINE ACCOUNT GROUPS AND FIELD SELECTION

FOR CSTOMERS

CREATE NEW ACCOUNT GROUP FOR SOLD TO PARTY

SELECT 0001 COPY AS (F6)

MENTION OUR ACCOUNT GROUP: H001 SOLD TO PARTY-H001

GENERAL DATA

Number range : H1

ENTER & SAVE IT

CREATE ACCOUNT GROUP FOR SHIP TO PARTY

SELECT 0002 COPY AS

MENTION OUR ACCOUNT GROUP: H003 GOODS RECIPIENT-H002

GENERAL DATA

Number range : H2

ENTER & SAVE IT

114 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE PAYER ACCOUNT GROUP

COPY 0003

MENTION OUR ACCOUNT GROUP: H003 PAYER-H003

GENERAL DATA

Number range : H3

ENTER & SAVE IT

CREATE BILL TO PARTY ACCOUNT GROUP

COPY 0004

MENTION OUR ACCOUNT GROUP: H004 BILL TO PARTY-H004

GENERAL DATA

Number range : H4

ENTER & SAVE IT

ONE TIME ACCOUNT

We check this only for CPD, CPDA account group

One time customer is a customer who may not place order next time

Q. What happens if I check one time account?

Ans. System will automatically ask for Name & Address, while creating Sales order.

CPD is Numeric number

CPDA is Character

Generally, we don’t waste the space of data base by creating separate customer master for each and
every one-time customer. We create one common Customer master for all one-time customers and
whenever one time customer places order we will use that customer number, then system will
automatically ask for Name & Address.

115 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FIELD STATUS

Field status will help to control the fields in Customer master. i.e., Whether to make the field
Mandatory/Optional/Display/Suppress.

Double click on general data

Under Select Group Select the Name of the field, Double Click

Check the options required.

CUSTOMER PRICING PROCEDURE (Sales and distribution data – Customer pricing procedure)

If we maintain Customer pricing procedure as 1 in account group, then system by default proposes it
while creating Customer Master.

PARTNER DETRMINATION PROCEDURE (Sales and distribution data – Customer pricing procedure)

Partner determination procedure will help to determine relevant partner functions in Customer
master.

Acc. Grp PDP Partner Functions

SOLD TO PARTY 0001 AG SP

SH
PY
BP

SHIP TO PARTY 0002 WE SH

PAYER 0003 RG PY

BILL TO PARTY 0004 RE BP

116 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PARTNER DETERMINATION

It is a process of determining relevant partner functions in Customer master.

T-CODE: VOPAN

PATH FOR PARTNER DETRMINATION

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES & DISTRIBUTION BASIC FUNCTIONS

PARTNER DETRMINATION SETUP PARTNER DETERMINATION

DOUBLE CLICK ON SET UP PARTNER DETERMINATION FOR CUSTOMER MASTER

SELECT CUSTOMER MASTER

CLICK ON CHANGE (SHIFT + F1)

PARTNER FUNCTIONS:

PF NAME PART. TYPE UNIQUE

SP Sold-to party KU ✓S
SH Ship-to party KU D
G
PY Payer KU F
BP Bill to party KU S
F
F
If we check Unique, then system will not allow to addSone more Partner function in Customer
Master. D
F
F
S
Q. What is the Partner type for our Partner functions?
F
Ans. KU E
H
Q. What happens if I check Unique?
G
Ans. System will not allow to create one more Partner function in Customer Master.

We have 4 steps to configure Partner determination

Step 1: Partner Determination Procedure

Step 2: Partner Functions in Procedure

Step 3: Partner Determination Procedure Assignment

Step 4: Account group function assignment

117 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONFIGURE PARTNER DETRMIANTION FOR SOLD TO PARTY

STEP 1: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES PDP CODE CAN BE

CUSTOMISED AS
PDP NAME PER THE
HAG SOLD TO PARTY REQUIRTEMENT

SAVE

STEP 2: PARTNRE FUNCTIONS IN PROCEDURE

SELECT PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON PARTNER FUCNTIONS IN PROCEDURE

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP PF’S NOT MOD. MANDATORY

HAG SP ✓ ✓
HAG SH ✓
HAG PY ✓
HAG BP ✓
SAVE

If we check not modifiable, then system will not allow to change the partner number in
Customer master.

If we check mandatory, then System by default determine that partner function in Customer
master.

STEP 3: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO OUR ACC. GORUP FOR SOLD TO PARTY

ACC. GRP PDP

H001 HAG

SAVE

118 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

STEP 4: ACCOUNT GROUP FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PF’S [Link]

SP H001

SH H001

PY H001

BP H001

ENTER (ENTER IF WE GET ERROR MESSAGE)

SAVE

CREATE SOLD TO PARTY WITH OUR OWN ACCOUNT GROUP (H001)

119 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONFIGURE PARTNER DETRMIANTION FOR SHIP TO PARTY

STEP 1: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP NAME

HWE SHIP TO PARTY

SAVE

STEP 2: PARTNRE FUNCTIONS ON PROCEDURE

SELECT PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON PARTNER FUCNTIONS IN PROCEDURE

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP PF’S NOT MOD. MANDATORY

HWE SH ✓ ✓
SAVE

TEP 3: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO OUR ACC. GORUP FOR SHIP TO PARTY

ACC. GRP PDP

H002 HWE

SAVE

STEP 4: ACCOUNT GROUP FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PF’S [Link]

SH H002

ENTER (ENTER IF WE GET ERROR MESSAGE)

SAVE

CREATE SHIP TO PARTY WITH OUR OWN ACCOUNT GROUP (H002)

120 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONFIGURE PARTNER DETRMIANTION FOR PAYER

STEP 1: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP NAME

HRG PAYER

SAVE

STEP 2: PARTNRE FUNCTIONS ON PROCEDURE

SELECT PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON PARTNER FUCNTIONS IN PROCEDURE

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP PF’S NOT MOD. MANDATORY

HRG PY ✓ ✓
SAVE

STEP 3: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO OUR ACC. GORUP FOR PARTY

ACC. GRP PDP

H003 HRG

SAVE

STEP 4: ACCOUNT GROUP FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PF’S [Link]

PY H003

ENTER (ENTER IF WE GET ERROR MESSAGE)

SAVE

CREATE PAYER WITH OUR OWN ACCOUNT GROUP (H003)

121 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONFIGURE PARTNER DETRMIANTION FOR BILL TO PARTY

STEP 1: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP NAME

HRE BILL TO PAERTY

SAVE

STEP 2: PARTNRE FUNCTIONS ON PROCEDURE

SELECT PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE

DOUBLE CLICK ON PARTNER FUCNTIONS IN PROCEDURE

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PDP PF’S NOT MOD. MANDATORY

HRE BP ✓ ✓
SAVE

STEP 3: PARTNER DETERMINATION PROCEDURE ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO OUR ACC. GORUP FOR PARTY

ACC. GRP PDP

H004 HRE

SAVE

STEP 4: ACCOUNT GROUP FUNCTION ASSIGNMENT

DOUBLE CLICK ON IT

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

PF’S [Link]

BP H004

ENTER (ENTER IF WE GET ERROR MESSAGE)

SAVE

CREATE BILL TO PARTY WITH OUR OWN ACCOUNT GROUP (H004)

122 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN ACCOUNT GROUPS AND NUMBER RANGES

Q. What is the T-Code to define Customer number ranges?

Ans. XDN1

Q. My customer number is taking Buffer, where is the control?

Ans. SNUM

Q. Where can we change the current number?

Ans. NR Status

Q. What is the purpose of Account group?

Ans. 1. It controls the fields in customer master. That is whether to make the field mandatory or
optional or display or suppress.

2. It controls partner functions.

3. Its controls Number ranges.

Q. What happens if we check One time account in Account group?

Ans. System will automatically ask for Name & Address, while creating Sales order.

Q. What is the purpose of field status in account group?

Ans. It will control the fields in Customer master

Q. What is the standard partner determination procedure for payer?

Ans. RG

Q. What is the standard partner determination for Bill to Party?

Ans. RE

Q. What is the purpose of Partner determination procedure in account group?

Ans. Partner determination procedure will help to determine relevant partner functions in Customer
master.

Q. What is the standard account group for one time customer?

Ans. CPD, CPDA

123 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN PARTNER DETERMINATION

Q. Where is the control that system will not allow to add one more Sold to party in Customer
master?

Ans. Unique Check

Q. What is the Partner type for our partner function?

Ans. KU

Q. What are the steps in Partner determination configuration?

Ans. We have 4 steps to configure Partner determination

Step 1: Partner Determination Procedure

Step 2: Partner Functions in Procedure

Step 3: Partner Determination Procedure Assignment

Step 4: Account group function assignment

Q. What happens if we check Not modifiable?

Ans. If we check not modifiable, then system will not allow to change the partner number in
Customer master.

Q. What happens if we check mandatory?

Ans. If we check mandatory, then System by default determine that partner function in Customer
master.

Q. Why we assign Partner functions to both Partner determination procedure and Account group?

Ans. We assign Partner functions to Partner determination procedure to determine Partner functions
in Customer master.

We assign Partner functions to account group to determine Partner number in Customer master.

ASSSIGNMENT

Clients’ requirement is if we create Ship to Party, system should determine Bill to Party also.

Ans: Partner Determination 2nd Step assign BP to WE partner function and 4th Step Assign account
group of SH to BP.

124 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MATERIAL MASTER

It is the Data of the Product which is stored centrally and used in day-to-day transactions wherever it
is required.

End Users are responsible to create Material Master.

Functional Consultants role in Material Master:

1. We give Training to Users on creating Material master.

2. We define new information on Material Master fields.

Material Code Logic:

The Length of Material Code is 18 characters (Digits).

Material Code logic will help end user to identify the product.

BRAND NAME AGE GROUP MG PACKING

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Example:

Medicine: VAXINE

BRAND NAME AGE GROUP MG PACKING

V A X I 1 5 3 0 0 1 0 0 B O T

Medicine: LEXIME

BRAND NAME AGE GROUP MG PACKING

L E X I 3 0 5 0 0 0 7 5 B O T

Material Master further classifies into multiple views.

Responsible Responsible

1. Basic Data 1 MM 11. MRP 1 PP

2. Basic Data 2 MM 12. MRP 2 PP
3. Sales Org Data 1 SD 13. MRP 3 pp
4. Sales Org Data 2 SD 14. MRP 4 MM
5. Sales General Plan Data SD 15. Plant Data Storage 1 MM
6. Foreign Trade export SD 16. Plant Data Storage 2 MM
7. Sales Text SD 17. Accounting 1 FI
8. Purchasing MM 18. Accounting 2 FI
9. Foreign Trade import MM 19. Costing 1 CO
10. Purchase order text MM 20. Costing 2 CO

125 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

T-CODE to CREATE MATERIAL MASTER IS MM01

T-CODE to CHANGE MATERIAL MASTER IS MM02

T-CODE to DISPLAY MATERIAL MASTER IS MM03

PATH TO CREATE MATERIAL MASTER

EASY ACCESS LOGISTICS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT MATERIAL MASTER

MATERIAL CREATE IMMEDIATELY

Material VAXI15300100BOT MATERIAL TYPE

FINISHED GOODS FERT
Industry Sector P Pharmaceuticals TRADING GOODS HAWA
RAW MATERIALS ROH
Material Type FERT Finished product SEMI FINISHED HALB
SERVICE DIEN
Click on enter

If we are not getting the material code

Click on Customized local layout (Alt + F12)

Click on options

Go to Interaction design

Visualization 1

✓ Show keys within dropdown lists

✓ Sort by keys within dropdown lists for most efficient keyboard input
Apply

OK

Select the Views (20 Views refer to Notes)

Click on Default settings (Shift + F2)

Click on Continue

Plant H100 (MP00)

Stor. Location H103 (1103)
Sales Org. H100 (1100)
Distr. Channel H1 (1U)
Click on Default setting (Shift + F1)

Continue

126 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

When we click on default setting, we will get error for the first time

“The company code H100 does not exist or has not been fully maintained”

To solve this error,

STEP-1

Go to the T-CODE: OBY6

Go to the Company Code (H100) (MN00)

Go to Details

Check the Fiscal year variant

If Fiscal year variant is V3, then December month Period will be 9.

If Fiscal year variant is K4, then December month Period will be 12.

STEP-2

go to the T-CODE: OMSY

Go to the Company code (H100) (Click on Position)

Mention

CoCd Company Name Year Pe FYr MP FYr LM ABp DBp

H100 (MN00) ALKEM LABORATORIES LTD 2021 9

Enter & Save

Again, Create Material Master from Starting

T-CODE: MM01

Material VAXI15300100BOT

Industry Sector P Pharmaceuticals MATERIAL TYPE

FINISHED GOODS FERT
Material Type FERT Finished product TRADING GOODS HAWA
RAW MATERIALS ROH
Click on Enter SEMI FINISHED HALB
SERVICE DIEN
If System is not displaying all the Views, then go to T-CODE OMS2

Go to Material Type (Click on Position) Plant H100 (MP00)

Stor. Location H103 (1103)

Select FERT → Go to Details
Sales Org. H100 (1100)
Click on Default setting
Distr. Channel H1 (1U)
Continue Click on Default setting (Shift + F1)

Continue

127 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

BASIC DATA 1

MATERIAL VAXI VAXINE 15 to 30 AGE GROUP 100 MG BOTTLE

General data

Base Unit of measure BT Material Group 001

Division H1 (1U)

Dimensions/EANs

Gross Weight 1

Net Weight 1

BASIC DATA 2

Blank

SALES: SALES ORG. 1

General data

Delivering Plant H100 (MP00)

Tax data

Tax Classification 1

SALES: SALES ORG. 2

Grouping Terms

Account assign group 03

SALES: GENERAL/PLANT

General Data

Availability check 02

Shipping Data

Transportation group 0001

Loading group 0001

FOREIGN TARDE EXPORT

Blank

SALES TEXT

Blank

PURCHASING

Blank

128 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FOREIGN TRADE IMPORT

Blank

PURCHASE ORDER TEXT

Blank

MRP 1

MRP Procedure

MRP Type PD

PRESS ENTER

SYSTEM WILL ASK FOR MRP CONTROLLER

PRESS F4 IN MRP CONTROLLER

When we press F4 in MRP controller we will get message

“No Values Selected

Maintain entries?”

CLICK ON YES

CONTINUE WITHOUT SPECIFYING PROJECT

SELECT

Materials Requirement planning Define MRP Controllers

CLICK ON CONTINUE

CLICK ON DEFINE MRP CONTROLLERS (Click on Clock Symbol)

CLICK ON POSITION AND ENTER PLANT: 1000 MRP CONTROLLER: 000

COPY 1000 000 COMBINATION

MENTION

PLANT CODE H100 (MP00)

ENTER

SAVE

GO BACK TO MATERIAL MASTER

MENTION MRP CONTROLLER

MENTION LOT SIZE : EX

129 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MRP 2

PRESS ENTER

IN SCHEDULE MARGIN KEY PRESS F4

When we press F4 in MRP controller we will get message

“No Values Selected

Maintain entries?”

CLICK ON YES

Continue w/o Specifying project

SELECT

Production Orders Define Schedule Margin Key

CLICK ON CONTINUE

CLICK ON DEFINE SCHEDULE MARGIN KEY (Click on Clock symbol)

CLICK ON POSITION AND ENTER PLANT: 1000 MRP CONTROLLER: 000

COPY 1000 000 COMBINATION

MENTION

PLANT CODE H100 (MP00)

ENTER

SAVE

(Go back twice)

Close the Window

MENTION SCHEDULE MARGIN KEY

MRP 3

Blank

MRP 4

Blank

PLANT DATA STORAGE 1

Blank

PLANT DATA STORAGE 2

Blank

130 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ACCOUNTING 1

Valuation Class 7920

Standard price 1000

ACCOIUNTING 2

Blank

COSTING 1

Blank

COSTING 2

Blank

SAVE

131 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FIELDS IN MATERIAL MASTER

BASIC DATA 1

Base Unit of Measure (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data – Base Unit of Measure)

It is a Unit in which we manufacture and store the goods.

BOTTLE BT
EACH EA
PIECE PC
CARTON CAR
BOX BOX
BAG BAG
BARREL BRL

Material Group (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

Grouping of the materials which will share the same attributes.

Old Material Number (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

If the Legacy material number and SAP material number is different, then here we maintain Legacy
material number for reference purpose.

Division (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

If we maintain Division here, then this Division will be determined into Sales document line item.

Item div
10 vaxi50600100bot 9a

Product allocation (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

Reserving the stocks to customers, Customer groups or Distribution channels to meet the future
requirements.

STOCK OPEN STOCK APOLLO CUSTOMER

X 10000 4000 6000

ORDER 1 ORDER 2 ORDER 3

CUST. DEALER CUST. DISTRIBUTOR CUST. APOLLO

X 4000 ✓ X 6000  X 6000 ✓

132 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

X-plant material status (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

This field will help to block the material across all the plants.

If we want to block the material, then we have to maintain Valid from date.

General item category group (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

This field is one of the parameters to determine item category in Inbound delivery process.

Gross Weight (Basic Data 1 tab – Dimensions/EANs)

It is the total weight of the product including packing.

Net Weight (Basic Data 1 tab – Dimensions/EANs)

It is the actual weight of the product without packing.

Product Hierarchy (Basic Data 1 tab – General Data)

A product having multiple levels.

SALES: SALES ORG. 1

Sales Unit (Sales org.1 - General Data)

It is a unit in which we sell the goods to customers.

If Base unit and Sales unit is different, then system will ask for conversion.

If we want to see the conversion in material master,

Go to ADDITIONAL DATA UNITS OF MEASURE

Click on MAIN DATA to go to MATERIAL MASTER

Sales Unit not Variable (Variable Sales Unit Not Allowed) (Sales org.1 - General Data)

If we check this, then system will not allow to change ethe sales unit manually while creating sales
document.

X-distribution change status (Sales org.1 - General Data)

This will to block the material for sales across all distribution channels.
133 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DChain-specific status (Sales org.1 - General Data)

This will to block the material for sales in a particular distribution channel.

Delivering Plant (Sales org.1 - General Data)

If we maintain plant here, then this plant will be determined into sales document.

The criteria to determine plant into Sales document

1. Customer Material Info Record (CMIR)

2. Customer Master
3. Material Master

Cash discount (Sales org.1 - General Data)

If we check this, then system will determine cash discount condition type (SKTO) into Sales
document.

CUST : 100659
TERMS OF PAYMENT : G030
CASH DISCOUNT : 2%
SALES DOCUMENT
CUST 100659
CONDITION TYPE
SKTO

IF we uncheck this, then system will not determine cash discount condition type into sales
document.

Tax Classification (Sales org.1 – Tax data)

This field controls whether the material is liable for tax or not.

Minimum order quantity (Sales org.1 – Quantity stipulations)

If we maintain this, then while creating sales order If order quantity is less than minimum order
quantity, then system will give warning message.

Minimum delivery quantity

If we maintain this, then while creating delivery if delivery quantity is less than minimum delivery
quantity, then system will give warning message or error message.

134 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SALES: SALES ORG. 2

Material Statistics group (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

This field controls whether to update material sales data into LIS reports or not.
LIS (Logistics information system) – It is a management reporting tool

Material pricing group (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

Grouping of the materials which will share the same pricing attributes.
This field will be used to group the materials for Group condition concept in pricing.

Volume rebate group (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

We have 3 types of rebates

1. Group Rebate (Announcing rebate on group of materials)

e.g. If Customer purchased X, Y, Z materials of 50,000 Qty from Jan 1st to Dec 31st, Then
he is eligible for a rebate of 10%.

2. Material Rebate (Announcing Rebate in a specific material)

3. Customer Rebate (Announcing Rebate irrespective of materials)

Volume rebate group (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

This field will help to group the materials for group rebate concept.

Account assignment group (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

This field is one of the parameters to determine revenue G/L accounts, while posting invoice values
into account. We maintain account assignment group of materials as “01” or “03”.

01 – Trading goods, 03 – Finished goods

Item category group (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

This field is one of the parameters to determine item category in sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT STANDARD : NORM

THIRD PARTY : BANS
ITEM CATEGORY IPO : BANC
MAKE TO ORDER : 0001
CONFIG. MATERIAL : 0002
BOM HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM : ERLA
BOM ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM : LUMF

135 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Pricing reference material (Sales org.2 Tab – Grouping terms)

If Pricing is same for multiple materials, then instead of maintaining price for each and every
material we maintain price for one material and assign this material as pricing reference material for
other materials. Then whatever the price we maintain the same price will be applicable to other
materials.

Materials A B C D E
Pricing 3000 (Pricing Ref Mat) A A A A
DIS 10%
Freight 300

SALES: SALES GENERAL/PLANT

Availability Check (Sales: General/Plant tab – General data)

This field controls how the sales order quantities should be updated into MRP (Materials
Requirement Planning).

We maintain availability check as “01” or “02”

01 : Daily requirements
02 : Individual requirements

01 DAILY REQUIREMENTS

MD04 STOCK REQUIREMENTS

X STOCK 100 AVL. QTY

CUST ORDERS -75 25

ORDER 23.12.2021 ORDER 23.12.2021 ORDER 23.12.2021

X 20 QTY X 25 QTY X 30 QTY

02 INDIVIDUAL REQUIREMENTS

MD04 STOCK REQUIREMENTS

X STOCK 100 AVL. QTY

20710 -20 80
20711 -25 55
20712 -30 25

20710 20711 20712

ORDER 23.12.2021 ORDER 23.12.2021 ORDER 23.12.2021

X 20 QTY X 25 QTY X 30 QTY

136 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

The difference between “01” and “02” is

“01” “02”
If we maintain “01” then system cumulates If we maintain “02” then each sales order
the sales order quantities of a particular day quantities will be updated separately into
and updates in a single line in MRP MRP along with sales order number.

The T-CODE to run MRP is MD01 / MD02

We can see this T-CODE in MD04 stock requirements.

If we maintain Availability check as KP then system will not perform availability

check.

Batch Management (Sales: General/Plant tab – General data)

If the material is relevant for batch, then check batch management.

Batch is the unique number system generates for the single lot of manufacture.

The purpose of batch management is to

- It will help to track expired goods

- It will help to track defective goods
- It will help to track the person responsible.

Transportation Group (Sales: General/Plant tab – Shipping data (times in days))

This field is one of the parameters to determine route into Sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT

ROUTE

Loading Group

This field is one of the parameters to determine Shipping point into Sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT

SHIPPING POINT

137 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Shipping point determines based in shipping conditions, Loading group and Plant.

SHIP. COND LOAD. GRP PLANT SHIPPING POINT

01 0001 H100 H102 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POINT

01 0003 H100 H101 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT
10 0001 H100 H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT
10 0003 H100 H103 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT

01 0001 H200 H202 AUTOMATIC SHIPPING POINT

01 0003 H200 H201 MANUAL SHIPPING POINT
10 0001 H200 H203 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT
10 0003 H200 H203 IMMEDIATE SHIPPING POINT

For normal materials we maintain loading group as “0001”

For delicate materials we maintain loading group as “0003”

The T-CODE for SHIPPING POINT DETERMINATION is OVL2

“0001” Automatic (Crane)

“0003” Manual

PATH FOR SHIPPING POINT DETERMINATION

SPRO SAPREFIMG LOGISTICS EXECUTION SHIPPING

BASIC SHIPPING FUCNTIONS SHIPPING POINT AND GOODS RECEIVING POINT

DETERMINATION ASSIGN SHIPPING POINTS

FOREIGN TRADE EXPORT

Control Code (Foreign trade tab)

In this field we maintain HSN code. HSN stands for Harmonized System Nomenclature.

HSN codes will help to determine GST rates.

HSN codes will be provided by GST department.

SALES TEXT

Here we maintain additional information of the material (Specifications of the material).

138 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PURCHASING

Purchasing Group (Purchasing tab – General Data)

Group of people within a purchasing department but working for different activities.

Plant specific material status (Purchasing tab – General Data)

This will help to block the material in a particular plant.

Automatic PO (Purchasing tab – General Data)

If we check this, then while creating sales order in Third party process and IPO process; System
automatically generates PO.

Third Party Process IPO Process (Individual Purchase Order)

Order Order

PR (Purchase Requisition) PR (Purchase Requisition)

PO (Purchase Order) PO (Purchase Order)

Purchasing Value Key (Purchasing tab – Purchasing Values)

This will help to send reminders to vendors for supplying the goods on time.

24.12.2021

PO (Purchasing Order) Vendor

Delivery Date: 05.01.2022 1st Reminder 01.01.2022

2nd Reminder 03.01.2022

GR Processing Time (Purchasing tab – Other data / manufacture data)

After unloading the goods How much time it will take to finally take the goods into storage location.

139 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MRP 1

MRP Group (MRP 1 tab – General data)

This field is one of the parameters to determine requirement type into Sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT

REQUIREMENT TYPE

MRP Type (MRP 1 tab – MRP procedure)

This field controls whether the material is relevant for planning or not (Planning means MRP
(Materials requirement planning)).

If the material is relevant for planning, then maintain MRP type as PD (Planning)

If the materials is not relevant for planning, then we maintain MRP type as ND (No planning).

1. Scrap materials we maintain MRP type as ND

MRP type is one of the parameters to determine requirement type into Sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT

REQUIREMENT TYPE

MRP type is one of the parameters to determine Schedule line category in Sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT

SCHEDULE LINE CATEGORY

MRP Controller (MRP 1 tab – MRP procedure)

MRP Controller is the person responsible to run MRP.

MRP 2

In-House production (MRP 2 tab – Scheduling)

It is the time taken to manufacture the goods.

Plant delivery time (MRP 2 tab – Scheduling)

After creating purchase order, how many days it will take to receive the goods from Vendor.
140 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Safety Stock (MRP 2 tab – Net requirements calculation)

It is the minimum stock which company has to maintain to meet the future emergency
requirements.

MRP 3

Strategy Group (MRP 3 tab – Planning)

This field controls whether the material is Make to order or make to stop.

If the material is “Make to order”, then maintain Strategy group as “20”.

If the material is “Make to Stock”, then maintain Blank or “10”.

Make to Order:

Make to order means after receiving the order from customer then only we will start the
process of manufacturing finished goods. Because the specifications of the product is not
standard. i.e., every customer will place order with their own specifications.
E.g., Heavy Machinery, Heavy electricals, Luxury Cars, Defense products etc.

Make to Stock:

Irrespective of customer’s orders we will manufacture the goods and stock of it. When order
comes, we will deliver the goods from the stock.

This field is one of the parameters to determine requirement type into Sales document.

SALES DOCUMENT

REQUIREMENT TYPE

The Criteria to determine requirement type into Sales document is

1. Strategy Group
2. MRP Group
3. Item Category + MRP type

Total Replenishment Lead time (MRP 3 tab – Availability check)

It is the total time taken to manufacture the goods and make the goods ready. The purpose of RLT is
it will help to perform delivery scheduling. Systems considers RLT if stock is not available.

141 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Plant data / Storage 1

Storage Conditions (Plant data/storage 1 – General Data)

This field is one of the parameters to determine storage locations in delivery document.

DELIVERY DOCUMENT

STORAGE LOCATION

The T-Code for Storage location determination is OVL3

The Path for Storage Location determination

SPRO SAP REF IMG LOGISTICS EXECUTION SHIPPING

PICKING DETERMINE PICKING LOCATIONS ASSIGN PICKING LOCATIONS

NEW ENTRIES

SHIP. POINT PLANT [Link] [Link]

H201 MP01 H200 MP00 01 H203 1103

H201 MP01 H200 MP00 02 H204 1104

H202 MP02 H200 MP00 01 H203 1103 FG1 ST. LOC NORM. TEMP

H202 MP02 H200 MP00 02 H204 1104 FG2 ST. LOC COOL TEMP

H203 MP03 H200 MP00 01 H203 1103

H203 MP03 H200 MP00 02 H204 1104

Total Shelf life (Plant data/storage 1 – Shelf-life data)

Here we maintain number of days and this will help to calculate the expiry date.

Minimum remaining Shelf Life (Plant data/storage 1 – Shelf-life data)

If we maintain number of days here and if the stock is going to expire within the number of days,
then that stock will not be considered while doing delivery.

142 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Accounting 1

Valuation Class (Accounting 1 – Current valuation)

Valuation class will help to determine G/L accounts for inventory accounting documents.

Inventory accounting document generates when you do PGI (Post Goods Issue) and the accounting
entry is

Cost of goods sold a/c Dr

To Inventory a/c/ Cr

ORDER

DELIVERY INVENTORY ACCOUNTING DOCUMENT

PGI Cost of Goods sold a/c Dr
To Inventory a/c/ Cr

For finished goods we maintain valuation class as “7920” and for Trading goods we maintain
valuation class as “3100”

Price Control (Plant data/storage 1 – Current valuation)

This field controls whether the cost of the product is standard cost or moving cost.

S – Standard Cost (Fixed Cost) All finished goods we maintain price control as S (Fixed Cost)

V – Moving Cost All Trading goods we maintain price control as “V”

If price control is “S”, then maintain cost in standard price.

If price control is “V”, then maintain cost in moving price.

The cost which we maintain in Material master will be determined into Sales Document with the
help of VPRS condition type.

SALES DOCUMENTS

CONDITION TYPE
VPRS 1000

If we maintain cost in Material master, then system will not generate inventory accounting
document.

The T-Code to change the cost in material master is MR21

143 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

EXTENDING THE MATERIAL TO OTHER DISTRIBUTION CHANNELS

T-CODE: MM01

Mention the details

Mention the Same Material number in Copy from

Press Enter

Select the Views

Enter

Enter the details

Enter the Distribution Channel

Enter the details under Copy from

Click on default setting and Continue

When we extend Material to other Distribution Channels, then system will allow us to visit only Sales
views.

Got through all 5 Sales views and Save it.

Extend the Material to remaining Distribution Channels (Institutions, Direct)

144 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

EXTENDING THE MATERIAL TO OTHER SALES ORGANISATION

T-CODE: MM01

Mention the details

Mention the Same Material number in Copy from

Press Enter

Select the Views

Enter

Enter the details

Enter the Sales Organization which we

want to extend with

Enter the

Distribution Channel as H4 (Direct)

Click on default setting and Continue

Visit all the views and save it.

145 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

EXTEND THE MATERIAL TO OTHER STORAGE LOCATIONS

T-CODE: MM01

Mention the details

Mention the Same Material number in Copy from

Press Enter

Select the Views

Enter

Enter the details

Enter the Storage Location which we

want to extend with

Click on default setting and Continue

Visit all the views and save it.

If we are extending the Material to other Storage location, then system will us to visit MRP 1, MRP2,
MRP 3, MRP 4, Plant data storage 1, Plant data storage 2 views.

Extend the Material to FG2 Storage Location, Return Storage location

146 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

EXTEND THE MATERIAL TO OTHER PLANT

T-CODE: MM01

Mention the details

Mention the Same Material number in Copy from

Press Enter

Select the Views

Enter

Enter the details

Enter the Plant & Storage Location

which we want to extend with

Click on default setting and Continue

Visit all the views and save it.

If we are extending the material to other plant, then system will allow us to visit all the views other
than Basic data 1 and Basic Data 2

Visit all the views and save it.

The T-CODE to see the list of materials MM60

Mention the Plant and Execute

147 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

TABLES IN MATERIAL MASTER

T-CODE: SE16N (To see the Tables)

T-CODE: SE11 (Technical information of Table)

Mention the table name and click on display.

TABLE

MARA GENERAL DATA (BASIC DATA 1, BASIC DATA 2, PLANT DATA STORAGE 1, PLANT DATA STORAGE 2)

MVKE SALES DATA (SALES ORG DATA 1, SALES ORG 2, FOREIGN TRADE EXPORT)

MARC PLANT DATA (SALES GENERAL PLANT DATA, PURCHASING, MRP 1, MRP 2, MRP 3, MRP 4)

MBEW ACCOUNTING (ACCOUNTING 1, ACCOUNTING 2)

148 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN MATERIAL MASTER

1. What is the Length of Material Code?

18 Digits

2. What is the purpose of old material number?

If the Legacy material number and SAP material number is different, then here we maintain
Legacy material number for reference purpose.

3. What is Product allocation?

Reserving the stocks to customers, Customer groups or Distribution channels to meet the
future requirements.

4. Clients’ requirement is they want to block the material across all the plants, where is the
control?
X-Plant material status

5. What is the purpose of General items category groups?

This field is one of the parameters to determine item category in in-bound delivery process

6. What is base unit of measure?

It is a Unit in which we manufacture and store the goods.

7. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to change the sales unit while creating sales
document, where is the control?
Check Sales Unit not variable

8. Clients’ requirement is they want to block the material for sales only for dealers, where is
the control?
D-Chain specific status

9. Clients’ requirement is they want to block the material for sales across all distribution
channels? Where is the control?
X-Distribution chain status

10. What is the criteria to determine Plant into Sales document?

CMIR, Customer Master, Material Master

11. What happens if I uncheck cash discounts in Material master?

IF we uncheck this, then system will not determine cash discount condition type into sales
document.

12. What is the purpose of Material statistics group?

This fields to controls whether to update the material sales data into LIS reports or not.

149 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

13. What is the purpose of material pricing group?

It is used to group the materials into Group condition concept in pricing.

14. What is the purpose of Volume rebate group?

This will help the group the materials into Group rebate concept.

15. What is the purpose of account assignment group?

This will help to determine revenue G/L accounts while posting invoice values into
accounting.

16. What is the purpose of item category group?

This field is one of the parameters to determine item category in Sales document.

17. What is the purpose of Pricing reference material?

If pricing is same for multiple materials, then we maintain price for one material assign this
material as pricing reference material for remaining materials, then same price will be
applicable to remaining materials.

18. What is availability check field in material master?

This field controls how the sales order quantity should be updated into MRP.

19. Explain the different between Availability check 01 & 02.

“01” “02”
If we maintain “01” then system cumulates If we maintain “02” then each sales order
the sales order quantities of a particular day quantities will be updated separately into
and updates in a single line in MRP MRP along with sales order number.

20. What is purpose of Transaction view?

This field is one of parameters to determine route into Sales document.

21. What is the T-CODE for Shipping point determination?

OVL2

22. How Shipping point determines?

Shipping Conditions, Loading group and Plant

23. What is the purpose of Loading group?

This field is one of the parameters to determine Shipping point into Sales document.

24. Where we maintain HSN codes in Material master?

Foreign trade export – Control Code

25. What happens if I check automatic PO in Material master?

In third party process and IPO

150 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

26. What is the purpose of purchasing value key?

This will help to send the reminders to Vendors for supplying goods on time.

27. What is Purchasing value key?

This will help to reminders to vendors for supplying the goods on time.

28. What is GR Processing time?

After unloading the goods How much time it will take to finally take the goods into storage
location.

29. What is the criteria to determine requirement type in Sales document MRP group?
1. Strategy Group
2. MRP Group
3. Item Category + MRP type

30. What is the purpose of MRP group?

This field is one of the parameters to determine requirement type into Sales document.

31. What is the purpose of MRP type?

This field controls whether the material is relevant for planning or not (Planning means MRP
(Materials requirement planning)).
If the material is relevant for planning, then maintain MRP type as PD (Planning)
If the materials is not relevant for planning, then we maintain MRP type as ND (No planning).
2. Scrap materials we maintain MRP type as ND

32. What is safety stock?

It is the minimum stock which company has to maintain to meet the future emergency
requirements.

33. What is In-house production?

It is the time taken to manufacture the goods.

34. What is Plant Delivery time?

After sending purchase order to vendor, how many days it will take to receive the goods.

35. How Storage location determines?

Shipping point, Plant and Storage conditions

36. T-Code for Storage Location determination?

OVL3

37. What is the purpose of storage conditions?

This field is one of the parameters to determine Storage location in delivery document.

38. What is RLT time and what is its purpose?

It is the total time taken to manufacture the goods and make the goods ready and the
purpose is delivery scheduling.
151 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

39. Which field differentiates whether the material is Make to order or Make to stop?
Strategy Group

40. Which field will help to calculate the expiry date?

Total Shelf life

41. What is the T-Code to change the cost in material master?

MR21

42. What happens if I don’t maintain cost in Material master?

System will not generate inventory accounting document.

43. How the cost will be determined into Sales document?

Based on VPRS condition type.

44. What is the purpose of valuation class?

This field will help to determine G/L account for inventory accounting document.

45. What is the table for Material master sales data?

MVKE

152 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CMIR
(CUSTOMR MATERIAL INFO RECORD)

CUSTOMER ALKEM CMIR

[Link] CODE MATERIAL CODE ALKEM [Link] [Link]. CODE

VAXINE1010 VAXI15300100BOT VAXI15300100BOT VAXINE1010

END USER
PURCHASE ORDER SALES ORDER

CUST. MATERIAL ALKEM MATERIAL

VAXINE 1010 100 QTY VAXINE1010 VAXI15300100BOT

If Customers are placing order with their own material codes, then we maintain CMIR. In CMIR we
will assign customer material code to company material code, then while creating sales order if user
enters customer material code, then system automatically determines our material code.

End User is responsible to create CMIR

T-CODE to create CMIR is VD51

PATH TO CREATE CMIR

SAP EASY ACCESS LOGISTICS SALES AND DISTRIUBUTION MASTER DATA

AGREEMENTS CUSTOMER MATERIAL INFORMATION CREATE

Mention

Customer : 100659 4000000209

Sales Organization : H100 1100

Distribution Channel : H1 1U

Enter

Mention the details in the table

Material no. Description [Link] RdPr UMGr

VAXI15300100BOT VAXINE1010

Enter & save it.

153 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Change Mode of CMIR: T-CODE: VD52

Fields in CMIR

1. Plant (CMIR, Customer Master, Material Master)

2. Delivery Priority (CMIR, Customer Master)
3. Minimum delivery qty (CMIR, Material Master)
4. Partial delivery/item (CMIR, Customer Master)
5. Max. Partial Deliveries (CMIR, Customer Master)
6. Under delivery Tolerance (CMIR, Customer Master)
7. Over delivery Tolerance (CMIR, Customer Master)
8. Unlimited tolerance (CMIR, Customer Master)
9. Item Usage (CMIR)

154 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONDITION MASTER

It is the Data of the price which is stored centrally and used in day-to-day transactions wherever it is
required.

Price means Selling price, discounts, transportation charges, Insurance, tax etc.

End User is responsible to create Condition Master.

We also call it as Pricing Master or Condition records.

The T-CODE to create Condition Master if VK11

PATH TO CREATE CONDITION MASTER

SAP EASY ACCESS LOGISTICS SALES AND DISTRIBUTION MASTER DATA

CONDITIONS SELECTION BY CONDITION TYPE VK11 - CREATE

Mention

Condition type : PR00

Enter

Select Material with release status

Enter

Mention

Sales organization : H100

Distribution channel : H1

Material : VAXI15300100BOT

Amount : 3000

Enter & Save

155 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

STOCK POSTING

T-CODE: MB1C

ENTER

MENTION

MOVEMENT TYPE : 561

PLANT : H200

STORAGE LOCATION : H203

ENTER

ERROR: 1

“Number range for trans./event type WA in year 2022 does not exist”

To Solve this error, go to the T-CODE: OMBT

Click on GROUPS

SELECT THE HEADING (Where WA is featured)

CLICK ON MAINTAIN

CLICK ON INSERT

MENTION THE YEAR 2022, From No. 4900000000 To Number. 4999999999

ENTER & SAVE IT

AGAIN, DO THE STOCK POSTING.

156 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 2

“Parameters for plant H200 not maintained in Inventory Management”

To Solve this error, we have 2 steps

1st Step

Go to the T-CODE:

PATH:

SPRO SAP REF IMG MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

INVENTORY MANAGEMENT & PHYSICAL INVENTORY PLANT PARAMETERS

CLICK ON IMG ACTIVITY

SELECT PLANT : 1000

CLICK ON COPY AS (F6)

MENTION

PLANT : H200

ENTER & SAVE IT

2nd Step

PATH:

SPRO SAP REF IMG PRODUCTION PRODUCTION PLANNING

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PLANNING PLANT PARAMETERS

CARRY OUT OVERALL MAINTENANCE OF PLANT PARAMETERS

CLICK ON COPY

MENTION

FROM PLANT : 1000

TO PLANT : H200

CLICK ON COPY

AGAIN, DO THE STOCK POSTING

157 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 3

“Posting only possible in periods 2021/09 and 2021/08 in company code H100”

To solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: MMPV

MENTION THE COMPANY CODE: H100

MENTION THE TODAYS DATE

EXECUTE

AGAIN, DO STOCK POSTING

Enter the Material

To Search the Material Code

Select the Sales Material by description

Mention

Sales org

Distribution. Channel

Enter

Mention the Quantity

Enter

We will get a message

“No stock posting possible for this material” (No combination is maintained for material type FERT
(Finished product) and Plant H200)

158 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 4

“No stock posting possible for this material” (No combination is maintained for material type FERT
(Finished product) and Plant H200)

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: OMS2

SELECT THE MATERIAL TYPE FERT

DOUBLE CLICK ON QUANTITY VALUE UPDATING

GO TO THE COMBINATION OF VALUATION AREA (PLANT) & MATERIAL TYPE (FERT)

ENTER

CHECK QUANTITY UPDATE & VALUE UPDATE

SAVE IT

AGAIN, DO THE STOCK POSTING

MENTION THE MATERIAL, QUANTITY

ENTER

ERROR: 5

“Check table 169P, entry H100 does not exist”

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: SM30

ENTER

MTNION THE TABLE : T169P

CLICK ON MAINTAIN

COPY 1000 COMPANY CODE (SELECT & COPY)

MENTION OUR COMPANY CODE: H100

ENTER & SAVE IT

----------------------------------------------------

AGAIN, DO THE STOCK POSTING

ENTER

SAVE IT

WHEN WE SAVE, WE WILL GET ERROR

159 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 6

“Interval 49 does not exist for object RF_BELEG H100 FBN1”

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: FBN1

MENTION

COMPANY CODE : H100

CLICK ON CHANGE INTERVALS

MENTION

No : 49

Year : 2021 (Fiscal Year – Press F1)

From No. :1

To Number : 9999

ENTER & SAVE IT

AGAIN, DO STOCK POSTING

SAVE IT

T-CODE to see the STOCK OVER VIEW: MMBE

METION

Material : VAXI15300100BOT

PLANT : H200

STORAGE LOCATION : H203

EXECUTE

160 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 7

“G/L a/c 799999 does not exist in company code H100”

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: FS00

ENTER

If we are not getting the Screen

Go to settings Hierarchy display Do not display navigation tree continue

Again, go to T-CODE: FS00

MENTION

G/L ACCOUNT : 799999

COMPANY CODE : 1000

CLICK ON BLOCK SYMBOL

UNCHECK ALL BLOCKS & SAVE IT

AGAIN, GO TO THE T-CODE: FS00

MENTION

G/L ACCOUNT : 799999

COMPANY CODE : H100

CLICK ON WITH TEMPLATE

MENTION

G/L ACCOUNT : 799999

COMPANY CODE : 1000

ENTER & SAVE IT

ERROR: 8

“G/L Account is not determined for Account Type “S” and Company Code H100 and for the year
2021”

To solve this error

GO TO THE T-CODE: OB52

GO TO THE 1000 VARIANTS, SELECT

MENTION THE SECOND YEAR AS 2022

161 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 9

“Controlling area is not maintained for Company code H100”

To solve this error

GO TO THE T-CODE: OKKP

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

MENTIOON

CONTROLLING AREA : H900

NAME : ALKEM CONTROLLING AREA

COMPANY CODE > CO AREA : 2 CROSS-COMPANY-CODE COST ACCOUNTING

CURRENCY TYPE : 10

CURRENCY : INR

CHART OF ACCOUNTS : INT

FISCAL YEAR VARIANT : V3

CCTR STD. HIERARCHY : 9 (WE CAN ANY NUMBER)

SAVE IT

CLICK ON YES AND CONTINUE

DOUBLE CLICK ON ASSIGNMENT OF COMPANY CODE

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

SAVE IT

DOUBLE CLICK ON ACTIVATE COMPONENTS/CONTROL INDICATORS

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

FISCAL AREA : 2021

COST CENTER : 1 COMMON ACTIVE

162 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 10

“Balancing field profit center in line item 001 not filled”

“Balancing field segment in line item 001 not filled”

“Balancing field Business area in line item 001 not filled”

To Solve this error

PATH

SPRO FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (NEW) GENERAL LEDGER ACCOUNTING (NEW)

BUSINESS TRANSACTIONS DOCUMENT SPLITTING

DEFINE DOCUMENT SPLITTING CHARECTERISTICS FOR GENERAL ACCOUNTING

UNCHECK MANDATORY FIELDS

SAVE IT

ERROR: 11

“Company Code is not assigned to country or country to calculation procedure”

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: OBBG

GO TO COUNTRY : IN

MENTION

TAX PROCEDURE: TAXD

SAVE IT

163 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ERROR: 12

“INT, GBB, BSA7920 not possible”

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: OMWD

CLICK ON POSITION

VALUATION AREA : H100

MENTION

VALUATION. GROUPING CODE : 0001

SAVE IT

164 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATING INQUIRY, QUOTATION, ORDER, DELIVERY AND INVOICE

T-CODE INQ. TYPE

INQUIRY VA11 IN

T-CODE QUO. TYPE

QUOTATION VA21 QT

T-CODE ORD. TYPE

ORDER VA01 ORD

T-CODE
DELIVERY VL01N

T-CODE
INVOICE VF01

Before we start the creating INQUIRY follow the below steps

165 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

STEP-1

GO TO CUSTOMER MASTER (XD02)

SALES AREA DATA

SHIPPING
Uncheck Relevant For POD
Shipping Conditions : 01

BILLING DOCUMENTS
Remove invoicing dates
Remove Invoicing List Dates
Remove Payment Guarantee Procedure

GENERAL DATA

UNLOADING POINTS
Remove Unloading Points
SAVE

STEP-2

GO TO MATERIAL MASTER (MM02)

MENTION

Material : VAXI15300100BOT Enter

BASIC DATA 1
Mention Gross weight :1
Mention Net Weight :1

SALES: SALES ORD. 1

Remove Sales Unit
Remove [Link] status
Remove DChain-spec. status

SALES: GENEREL PLANT

Availability check : 02
Uncheck Batch management
Loading Group : 0001

MRP 3
Strategy group : Blank

ACCCOUNTING 1
Valuation Class : 7920
Standard price : 1000
SAVE

166 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE INQUIRY

T-CODE : VA11

INQUIRY TYPE : IN

MENTION

SALES AREA

ENTER

When you press ENTER, if we get error “Sales area is not defined for inquiry type IN”

To Solve this Error

GO TO THE PATH

SPRO SAP REF IMG SALES & DISTRIBUTION SALES

SALES DOCUMENTS SALES DOCUMENT HEADER

ASSIGN SALES AREA TO SALES DOCUMENT TYPES

Double click on Combine Sales organizations

Go to our Sales organization

Maintain same Sales Organization in Reference Sales Organization

Save

Double click on Combine Distribution channels

Go to our Sales Organization & Distribution Channel

Maintain Distribution Channel in Reference Distribution Channel

Save

167 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Double click on Combine Divisions

Go to our Sales Organization & Division

Mention the Same Division in Reference Division

Save

Double click on Assign Sales order type permitted for Sales areas

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

We will get a warning message

PRESS ENTER

Mention

Save

168 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

GO TO VA11 FOR INQUIRY

T-CODE : VA11

INQUIRY TYPE : IN

MENTION
SALES AREA
ENTER

MENTION

Sold to Party : 100659

Item overview Tab

Mention the Material Number : VAXI15300100BOT
Order Quantity : 500
Enter

When we press ENTER, we will get error message “No pricing procedure could be determined”

To Solve this Error

Step 1

Go to the T-CODE: V/08

GO TO NEW ENTRIES

Mention

Procedure : H00001 (Can enter any number, maximum 6 digits)

Description : Alkem Pricing procedure

Select the procedure

Double click on Control

Go to New Entries

Step : 10
CTyp (Condition Type) : PR00
Requirement :2
Account Key : ERL
SAVE

169 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step 2

Go to the T-CODE: OVKK

Go to New Entries

Mention the Sales Area

Sales Organization : H100

Distribution Channel : H1

Division : H1

D0Pr (Document Pricing Procedure) :A

CuPP (Customer Pricing Procedure) :1

PriPr (Pricing Procedure) : H00001

Condition Type : PR00

Save

Step 3

Go to the T-CODE: VK11

Go to the condition type : PR00

Select Material

Mention the Sales Organization : H100

Distribution Channel : H1

Mention

Material : VAXI15300100BOT
Amount : 3000
Enter & Save

Create enquiry VA11

Mention Sales Area

Enter
Sold to Party : 100659
Mention
Material
Quantity
Enter
Check the net value
Go to Edit → Incompletion log

If document is complete, then Save

170 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE QUOTATION WITH REFEFRENCE TO ENQUIRY

T-CODE: VA21

Mention

Quotation Type : QT

Mention the Sales Area

Click on Create with reference

Mention

Inquiry Number : 10000110

Sold to Party : 100659

(Mention the Sold to Party number click on search if we don’t remember the Inquiry
number)

Click on Copy

In Quotation Mention

Valid from Date : 01.01.2022

Valid to Date : 31.01.2022

Check the Net Value (It should not be Zero)

Go to Edit

Incompletion Log (If document is complete, then save)

Save

Double click on the line (On Material Number)

Go to Shipping Tab

(If Shipping point is Blank in Quotation, then we have to do Shipping point

determination)

Again, create the Quotation VA21 and Save it.

171 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE SALES ORDER WITH REFERENCE TO QUOTATION

T-CODE: VA01

MENTIIOK

ORDER TYPE: OR

Mention the Sales Area

Sales Organization : H100

Distribution Channel :

Click on create with reference

Mention the Sold to party (Customer number)

Click on Copy

Mention PO Number : 1111 (Any number)

Enter

Check the Net Value

Double click on Line Item

Go to Schedule lines

Note the date on which quantities are confirmed

Go to Shipping Tab

Check the Shipping Point (Remember)

Go to Edit and click on Incompletion Log

Save

172 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE DELIVERY

T-CODE: VL01N

Mention

Selection Date : As per the Delivery Date ([Link])

Shipping Point : As per the Order

Enter

Go to Picking Tab

Mention the Storage location in which stock is available (Check MMBE if required)

Mention the pick quantity (Same as delivery quantity)

Enter

Click on Post Goods Issue (Shift + F8)

When we click on post goods issue

1. Stock will be reduced from unrestricted stock (Check MMBE)

2. Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Cost of sold a/c Dr

To Inventory a/c Cr

To see the Inventory accounting document

Go to Change mode of delivery (T-CODE: VL02N)

Click on Document Flow (f7)

Select Goods issue delivery

Click on Display Document

Click on Accounting documents

173 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE INVOICE

T-CODE: VF01

(We will get the delivery number automatically)

If we are not getting Delivery number go to T-CODE: VF03N (Display mode)

Press Enter

Check the Net Value

Save it

When we save Invoice, we will get an error message “Error in account determination”

To Solve this error

Go to the T-CODE: VKOA

Double click on 004 (General)

Go to New entries
Mention
App (Application) : V

CndTy. (Condition type : KOFI

ChAc (Chart of accounts : INT

SOrg. (Sales Organization) : H100

G/L Account : 800000

Enter & save it

Go to Change mode of Invoice T-CODE: VF02

And Click on Flag Symbol (Release

When we click on Flag symbol, we will an error message “Interval 14 does not exist for object
RF_BELEG H100 FBN1”

To solve this error

Go to the T-Code: FBN1

Mention
Company Code: H100
Click on change intervals
Click on insert line (F6)
Enter the details

174 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Again, go to Change mode of Invoice T-CODE: VF02

Click on Flag Symbol (No Error)

Click on Accounting (Check the Accounting entry)

ERRORS IN CREATING INVOICE

“Order cannot be delivered see long text”

Solution:

“No schedule line due for delivery”

Go to Schedule lines
Check the confirmed date
Change the delivery date to future date

“Company code is not defined” While creating accounting document

Billing document: xxxxxx
Company code is not defined error

“Maintain plant 100V for the sales area” While creating enquiry

- Assignment of Sales organization/Distribution Channel

- Change view” Stock transport order”

“Delivery split because of different shipping point”

Got o Sales order and check shipping point
OVL2 – Change Shipping point
Start doing from the starting

“Factory calendar is missing”

Go and check Calendar in Enterprise structure
Plant, Shipping point and Sales organization

“Accounting document cannot be generated”

Go to change mode and click on flag

“Error with Period”

OMSY

“Posting only possible in periods 2022/01 and 2021/12 in company code c100” While doing PGI
“Order cannot be delivered

175 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PRACTICE FIELDS IN CUSTOMER MASTER

1. Clients’ requirement is system should allow to create delivery only on Saturdays.

Create New Customer Calendar

Check only Saturdays as working and maintain that calendar master in Unloading points.

Result: System will display delivery date on Saturday

2. Relevant for POD (Check)

Go to Customer Master
Go to Sales Area data
Shipping Tab
Check relevant for POD

Create Order, Delivery and Invoice

“System will give a message
Go to Edit, Click on Log to
check the error

T-CODE: VLPOD
Enter
Mention the POD Date
Click on confirm Date
Save
(Uncheck Rel for POD after practicing)

3. Practice CMIR

T-CODE: VD52

4. Practice Item Proposal

Go to the T-CODE: VA51

Mention The item proposal type: PV
Mention the Sales area
Enter
Mention Description
Valid from ……………….to………………
Mention the Materials, Quantity and Save it
Note the generated number
Go to Change mode of customer: XD02
Go to Sales Tab
Mention Item proposal number
Save
T-CODE: VAO1 (ORDER)
Mention the customer number
Click on Propose Items (CTRL + F11)
Click on the Option
176 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

5. Payment Guarantee procedure

Go to Customer Master: XD02

Billing Tab
Billing Docs
Maintain Payment Guarantee procedure: 0001
(System will not allow to create the delivery)

When we receive payment guarantee procedure from customer, then

Go to the T-CODE: VKM3

Mention the order number
Execute
Release and Save

6. Clients’ requirement is for some customers they want to create invoice only on month
end.

Create Calendar
Uncheck All working days
Go to special Rules
Mention the Month end Dates
Save the Calendar
Maintain the Calendar in Invoicing Dates.

7. Practice Over Delivery Tolerance (Create Separate Customer and Practice, if you have CMIR
maintained we have to practice this and below)
If we are not getting Error Message
Go to T-CODE – 0VLP and Select Item Category TAN
Go to Details
Mention Check Over Delivery – Maintain A/B
A for
B for
If CMIR is maintained for the Customer, we have to maintain Over Delivery Tolerance in CMIR
also.
8. Practice Under Delivery Tolerance

177 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

17012022

9. Practice Invoicing List Dates

Maintain Invoice Dates Calendar in Invoicing List dates also

Create 3 Invoices for Same Customer
Go to VF24
Mention the Month end date, Billing Type: LR, Sales Org: H100

10. Clients’ requirement is System should calculate Credit period from every month 25th

Create Terms of Payment and maintain fixed date as 25th.

Maintain in the Customer Master
Create Invoice and Go to Change mode of Invoice
Click on Accounting
Double click on Customer number
Check the Base Line date (Should be 25th)

11. Practice both Fixed date 25 and additional month 1

12. Practice complete delivery required

Create New Material

Maintain RLT Time: 15 days
Maintain Stock 100 Qty (Stock Posting)
Create Order for 160 Qty
In Material Master maintain RLT 160R
Partial Delivery per Item (C)

13. Practice Blocking and Unblocking the Customer

14. Practice Customer flag for Deletion
15. Clients’ requirement is System should allow maximum 2 partial deliveries

Create Order for 100 Qty

Create Delivery for 30 Qty twice, third time system should not allow to create the
partial delivery.

16. Practice the Plant determination in Sales Order

The Criteria for Plant Determination CMIR, Customer Master and Material Master

Maintain different plant in CMIR, Customer Master and Material Master and find out which
one system is taking.

178 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

17. Practice Changing the Customer from One account group to another
T-code: XD07
Mention the Customer Number – Enter
Click on Continue
Mention the Account Group – H001
(Before this go and check the Customer account group number in XD03
Go to Extras – Administrative Data)
Continue and Continue on Warning
Check the Extras – Administrative data in XD03
Enter

Question:

What is the Pre-Requisite to change the customers from One account group to another account
group?

Ans: Mandatory fields/Required fields should be same in both the account groups.

18. Practice Cash discount condition type in Sales Order

SKTO Condition Type
Go to T-CODE: V/08
Select Your Pricing Procedure – H0001
Double Click on Control
Go to New Entries

Enter and Save

179 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

PRACTICE FIELDS IN MATERIAL MASTER

1. Clients’ requirement is they want to block the material for Sales across all distribution
channels
X-Distribution Chain Status

2. Clients’ requirement is they want to block the material for Sales in a particular distribution
channel
D-Chain Specification Status

3. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to change Sales unit while creating Sales Order.
Check Sales Unit not Variable

4. Practice Availability check 01 and 02

Create one material with 01 and create 3 orders
Create Second material with 02 and create 3 orders
Check MD04

5. Practice Pricing reference material

Create New Material and give the pricing reference material of another material, then system
will take the pricing of the given material without maintaining the price.

6. Practice Minimum order quantity

7. Practice Minimum Delivery quantity
8. Practice RLT Time (for FERT Material)
9. Practice Plant Delivery time (for Trading Goods)
10. Practice the Changing the Cost in Material Master
T-CODE to the change the cost the in-Material master is MR21
Mention the Company code and Plant
Press Enter
Mention the Material Name, New Price
(Cross check the Old price in MM03 in accounting)
Enter & save it
11. Practice Storage Location determination in Delivery document

180 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

INVOICE CANCELLATION

T-CODE: VF11

Mention the Invoice Number which we want to cancel

Press Enter
Save it

REVERSE PGI

T-CODE: VL09

Mention the Shipping Point (H202)

Mention The Delivery Number and Execute
Select the Delivery and click on Reverse
Click on Continue
Click on Continue

181 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

18012022

COLLECTIVE PROCESS

Collective Process of Deliveries:

T-CODE: VL10A/VL10C

Create 5 orders out of that first 2 orders for same customer

Create 3rd, 4th and 5th orders for different customers

Go to the T-CODE: VL10C

Mention the Shipping Point: H202

Execute

Select All

Click on Background
(We will get a same message See log for information on clicking deliveries)

Click on Log for Delivery creating (Shift + F4)

Select the Line and Click on Documents

182 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Collective Process of Picking:

T-CODE: VL06P

Go to the T-CODE: VL06P

Mention the Shipping Point

Execute

Select All and Click on Change

Enter the Storage Location and Pick Quantity and Save

Click on Yes

Do the same Process for remaining Order Documents

Collective Process of PGI:

T-CODE: VL06G

Go to the T-Code: VL06G

Mention the Shipping Point

Execute

Select All and Click on Post Goods Issue

Give the current Date and Click on Continue

183 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Collective Process of Invoice:

T-CODE: VF04

Go to the T-Code: VF04

Mention the Date

Mention the Sales organization

Execute

Select All and Click on Collective Billing document online

Save it

Delivery Monitor: T-CODE: VL06O

List of Enquiries: T-CODE: VA15N

List of Quotations: T-CODE: VA25N

List of Orders: T-CODE: VA05N

List of Contracts: T-CODE: VA45N

List of Scheduling Agreements: T-CODE: VA35N

List of Billing Documents: T-CODE: VF05N

184 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

19012022

STRUCTURE OF SALES DOCUMENT

Structure of Sales document is divided into 3 parts

1. Header Data
2. Item Data
3. Schedule Line Data

TABLE SOURCE
HEADER DATA Customer Master
VBAK Some part of Configuration data
Sales Document Types Some part of Control data

ITEM DATA Material Master

CMIR
VBAP
Item Category Some part of Configuration data
Some parts of Control data

SCHEDULE LINE DATA Some part of Configuration data

VBEP Some part of Control data
Schedule Line Category

HEADER DATA is the data which is applicable to all the line items in Sales document.

The source of Header data is Customer Master, Some part of configuration data and some part of
Control data.

Header data will be controlled by Sales document types.

The Table for Header data is VBAK.

ITEM DATA is the data which is applicable to particular line item in Sales document.

The source of Item data is Material Master, CMIR, Condition Master, some part of configuration data
and some part of control data.

Item data will be controlled by item category.

The Table for Item Data is VBAP.

SCHEDULE LINE DATA is the data which consists of delivery dates and confirmed quantities.

The source of Schedule line data is some part of configuration data and some parts of control data.

Schedule line data will be controlled by Schedule line category.

185 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

The Table for Schedule line Data is VBEP.

OTHER TABLES

Business Data - VBKD

(Business is the data which copies into Sales document from Customer master → Sales tab and Billing Tab)

Document Flow table - VBFA

Header Status - VBUK

Item Status - VBUP

Partner Functions - VBPA

Pricing Table - KONV

Pricing Structure - KOMV

The T-CODE to see the table data is SE16N

186 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SALES DOCUMENT TYPES

Doc. Type T-CODE

Inquiry IN VA11
Quotation QT VA21
Order OR VA01
Rush Order RO VA01
Cash Sales CS VA01
Returns RE VA01
Credit Memo Request CR VA01
Invoice Correction Request RK VA01
Debit Memo Request DR VA01
Free of Charge FD VA01
Subsequent Delivery Free of Charge SDF VA01
Consignment Fill-up CF VA01
Consignment Issue CI VA01
Consignment Returns CONR VA01
Consignment Pickup CP VA01

Quantity Contract QC VA41

Value Contract General WK1 VA41
Value Contract Material Specific WK2 VA41
Scheduling Agreement DS VA31
Item Proposal PV VA51

187 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

BUSINESS PROCESS
OTC PROCESS (Order to Cash)

ORDER MRP
Transfer of Requirements

Run MRP

System Check the Stock of FG

If Stock of FG is available If Stock of FG is not available

Order Confirmation System Check the stock of RM

Delivery If Stock of RM is available If Stock of RM is not available

Invoice Production PR

Quality Check PO

Unrestricted Stock VENDOR

Order Confirmation MIGO (Goods Receipt)

Delivery Production

Invoice Quality Check

Unrestricted Stock

Order Confirmation

Delivery

Payment
CUSTOMER Invoice

188 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MRP - Materials requirement Planning

RM - Raw Material
PR - Purchase Requisition
PO - Purchase Order
MIGO - Movement in Goods out (Goods Receipt)

In OTC process Order, Delivery and Invoice will be from SD

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

STANDARD PROCESS

INQUIRY

Mail (Attachment)
QUOTATION CUSTOMER
PO: 200010

SALES ORDER
(PO no: 200010 Order Confirmation Mail
will be mentioned CUSTOMER
in the Sales Order)

DELIVERY

INVOICE

INQUIRY:

- The Different methods of Inquiry is E-Mail, Website, Phone, Walk-in, Tender, Exhibitions etc.
- Whenever the Company receive Inquiry from Customers, then Users will create Inquiry
document in SAP.
- Inquiry is an internal document (This will not be sent to Customer).
- Inquiry document consists of Customer information, Material information and Quantity
information.

QUOTATION:

- After Inquiry User will create Quotation and send it to Customer.

- Quotation is an external document and is a Legal document.
- Quotation document consists of Customer information, Material information, Quantity
information, Validity periods, Pricing and Terms & Conditions.
(If Customer satisfies with the Quotation, then Customer will send PO copy to company, Then
User will create Sales order in SAP)

189 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SALES ORDER:

- Sales order is an agreement between Company and the Customer for supplying the goods.
- Sales order consists of Customer information, Material information, Quantity information,
PO number, Pricing, Terms and Conditions, Delivery dates.
- After creating Sales Order, we send order confirmation mail to customer.
- When we create Sales Order, in the background system will perform various activities in a
sequence. They are
• Partner Determination
• Listing/Exclusion
• Material Determination
• Free Goods
• Delivery Scheduling
• Availability Check
• Pricing
• Credit Management
• Text Determination
• Output Determination
• Transfer of Requirements

21012022

DELIVERY:

When we create Delivery, we take picking list print out and give it to the responsible person. Then
that person will pick the goods from storage location. Then they enter pick quantity in Delivery
document. After that they will send the goods to packing department. Then Packing department
people will pack the goods and send the goods to Shipping point. In Shipping point the responsible
people will do the loading activity and once loading is completed then they do PGI. After PGI, they
take Delivery challan copy and give it to truck person. Then they create Invoice and take Invoice copy
print out and give it to truck person. Then truck will leave the plant.

When we do PGI System will perform these activities

1. Stock Updates
2. Inventory Accounting Document Generates
Cost of Goods sold a/c Dr
To Inventory a/c Cr
3. It updates in Document Flow
4. It updates in LIS
5. It updates in Credit Management
6. I t updates in Billing due list

When we create Invoice system will perform activities

1. Revenue accounting document generates

Customer a/c Dr
To Revenue a/c Cr
2. Controlling document generates
3. Profitability analysis generates
190 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

4. It updates in Document flow

5. It updates in LIS
6. It updates in Credit management

SPLIT CRIETERIA FOR DELIVERIES:

1. Shipping Point
2. Incoterms
3. Ship to Party
4. Delivery Date
5. Route

SPLIT CRIETERIA FOR INVOICE

1. Payer
2. Payment Terms
3. Invoice date

INTERVIEW QUESTIONS IN STANDARD PROCESS

1. Explain the Standards Process in Sales.

Our Standard process involves Inquiry, Quotation, Sales Order, Delivery and Invoice.

2. What are the activities system performs when we create Sales Order?

3. What are the activities system performs when we do PGI?

4. What are the activities system performs when we create Invoice?

5. What is the Split criteria for deliveries?

6. What is the Split criteria for Invoice?

7. What is the difference between billing document and invoice?

Billing document is the document which we create in SAP.
Invoice is the output of Billing document which we send it to customers.

8. How many maximum number of line items we can have in one Order?
9,99,999
9. Can I have 2 Ship to parties in one order?
Yes
10. What is the source of Header data?

11. What is the source of Item data?

12. What is the source of Schedule line data?

13. What is the table for Sales document partner function?

14. What is the table for Pricing?

191 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

22012022

RUSH ORDER PROCESS

(Immediate Delivery Order)

If Customer is asking for delivery immediately then we do Rush Order Process.

Step-1 Doc type T-CODE

Rush Order RO VA01

Shipping Conditions “10”

Immediate Shipping Point “H203”

Step-2
Automatic Delivery
Step-3
(Go to Change mode of Delivery and do PGI) VL02N

Step-4
Invoice VF01

- In Rush Order system determines Shipping conditions as “10”.

- In Rush Order process system determines Immediate Shipping point.
- In Rush Order Process system automatically creates delivery. Then Users will go to change
mode of delivery and do the PGI. Then they create Invoice with reference to delivery

Create Rush Order

T-CODE: VA01

Enter the Document Type & Sales Area

Mention the Customer Number & PO Number

Mention the Material & Quantity

Go to Header Data (Shipping Conditions-10)

Save

Go to Change mode of Delivery (VL02N) → DO Picking and PGI

Create Invoice (VF01)

Enter & Save

192 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CASH SALE PROCESS

(Counter Sale Process)

If Client is having own outlets, then we will have Cash Sale process.

In Cash Sale process we will have direct customers.

In Cash sale process direct customer will walk-in into outlet, Pick the goods and go to counter, pay
the cash, take the bill and leave the counter along with the goods.

Step-1 Doc. Type T-CODE

Cash Sale order CS VA01
Direct Customer
Shipping Conditions “10”
Immediate Shipping point “H203”

Step-2 Step-3
Invoice Copy/Bill Automatic Delivery
Step-4
Change mode of Delivery & PGI
Step-5
Cash Sale Invoice

- In Cash Sale process generally, the customer will be direct customer.

- In Cash Sale process system determines Shipping conditions as 10.
- In Cash Sale process system determines immediate shipping point.
- In Cash Sale process when you save Cash sales order system will generate Invoice copy or Bill
in the background.
- In Cash sale process when we save Cash sale order, System will create delivery automatically
in the background.
- In Cash Sale process PGI and Invoice will be done when the counter is free.
- In Cash Sale process they create Cash Sale Invoice with the reference to Cash sale order.

Q. Why we create Cash Sale Invoice with the reference to Cash Sale Order?

We give Invoice copy to Customer based on Cash Sale Order and legally that should be
referred to create Cash Sale Invoice.

193 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

24012022

CASH SALE PROCESS IN SYSTEM

For Cash Sale Order Create Direct Customer/One time Customer

XD01 – Account group CPD/CPDA

Mention Company Code, Sale Area
Create Customer with details

T-CODE TO CREATE CASH SALE PROCESS: VA01

Create the Cash Sale Order

While creating Cash Sale order we will get error

“no pricing procedure could be determined”

To Solve the Error

Go to the T-Code: OVKK

Go to New Entries
Mention the Sales Area

Go to the T-Code: VK11

Mention the condition type: PR00 – Enter

Select Material with release status – Enter
Mention Sales Organization - H100
Distribution Channel - H4
Material Number - XXXXXXXXXXXX
Quantity - xxxx
Create Cash Sale Order again

To see the print out in Cash Sale Order

Go to Change mode of Cash Sale Order
Go to Sale Document
Issue Output To
Select the Cash Sale Invoice
Click on Print

Go to Change mode of Delivery

Do PGI

Create Invoice

194 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

25012022
RETURN PROCESS
Whenever Customer return the goods, we do Return process in SAP.
The below scenarios Customers will return the goods

a. Damage
b. Defective
c. Expired
Whenever Customer finds Damaged/Defective/Expired goods, then customer will inform to
company (Sales Manager). Then Sales Manager will send employee to Customer’s place to cross
check the goods. After cross checking the goods employee will prepare Return note.

Return Note consists of

RETURN NOTE
INVOICE NO. CUSTOMER NO.
INVOICE DATE:
ITEM NO MATERIAL QUANTITY REASON BATCH NO
10 VAXI1530 100 DAMAGE

EMPLOYEE CUSTOMER
SIGNATURE SIGNATURE

After preparing Return note Employee will submit this to End User. Then End User will create return
order with the reference to Invoice.

INVOICE (90040058)
15 Lacs
With reference to

Step-1
RETURN ORDER (3 Lacs)
ORDER REASON
BILLING BLOCK Step-3
AUTHORIZED PERSON
(Will go to the change mode of Sales
order and remove billing block)

Step-4 Step-2
RETURN INVOICE (3 Lacs) RETURN DELIVERY
PGR (Post Goods Receipt)

ACCOUNITNG DOCUMENT
Revenue a/c Dr
To Customer a/c Cr

195 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

- We create Return Order with the reference to Invoice.

- In Return Order we have to mention Order reason.
- Return Order will be automatically blocked for billing.
- In Return Order we have to change the quantity (which is damaged or defective).
- After Return order when we receive the goods from customer, the we do return delivery and
PGR.
- After Return delivery and PGR authorized person will go to change mode of Return Order
and remove Billing block.
- The User will create Return Invoice with the reference to Return Order.
- When we create Return Invoice, System generates accounting document and the accounting
entry is
Revenue a/c Dr
To Customer a/c Cr
- When we create Return Invoice, the return Invoice value will be deducted from Customer’s
outstanding balance.
- When we do return delivery
• Stock will be added to return stock
• Inventory accounting document will not generate. Because return stock is a temporary
stock.
• After taking the stock into return stock, then a separate team will physically check the
stock and then they decide whether to move the return stock to Block stock or Quality
inspection stock or Unrestricted stock.
• When we move the stock from return stock to other stock, then inventory accounting
document will generate.

Q. Why we create to Return Invoice with the reference to Return Order?

A. When we create the Return Invoice system should copy the quantity from Return order.

196 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

STEP-1

CREATE RETURN ORDER WITH THE REFERENCE TO INVOICE

T-CODE: VA01
Order type : RE
Mention
Sales Organization : H100
Distribution Channel : H1
Division : H1

Click on create with reference

Click on Billing Document
Mention
Sold to party : XXXXXX
Click on search
Double Click on the invoice for which
billing type is F2.
Click on Copy
Change the Quantity as per the Return Invoice
Mention the Order reason
Remove the Billing Block
Save

STEP-2

CRETAE RETURN DELIVERY

T-CODE: VL01N

Mention:
Shipping Point & Enter
Go to picking and enter the storage location
(In Return delivery pick quantity field will be disabled)
Click on Post Goods receipt

Check the stock in MMBE

To check the Inventory document

Go to Change mode of Delivery: VL02N

Click on document flow
Select GD returns
Click on Display documents
Click on accounting docs

197 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

STEP-3

CRETAE RETURN INVOICE WITH THE REFEFRENCE TO RETURN ORDER

T-CODE: VF01

We will get return order number and Enter

If we get a error

Go to Change mode of Return Order and remove Billing Block

Go to VA02 & Enter
Billing Block make it Bank and Save

Create return Invoice now

Go to: VF01
Enter with Return Delivery doc. Number
Save

To see the revenue accounting document

Go to change mode of Invoice: VF02

Click on accounting
Check the accounting entry

198 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

28012022
CREDIT MEMO REQUEST

If we want to deduct some amount from customers outstanding without physical movement of
goods, then we do Credit Memo request.

The below scenarios we do Credit memo request.

1. User mistakenly overcharge Previous Invoice.

2. Goods are totally damaged and which are not in a position take back.

USER MISTAKELY OVER CHANRGE PREVIOUS INVOICE

Invoice Qty Amount Value Act. Amt Act. Value Over Charged
VAXI1530 500 3000 1500000 2750 1375000 125000

Step-1
Credit Memo Request
Change the Value to Rs. 1,25,000
Order reason
Billing Block Step-2
Remove Billing Block

Step-3
Credit Memo Invoice
Value – Rs. 1,25,000 Accounting Document
Revenue a/c Dr
To Customer a/c Cr
Step-1

Create Credit Memo Request

T-CODE: VA01
Order type: CR
Mention the Sales Area
Click on Create with the reference
Mention the Invoice number & Enter
To change the value in Credit memo request, double click on Line item
Go to Conditions
Change the Value in Condition value
Enter
Go Back and GO to Sales Tab
Mention Order Reason (100 Price Discrepancy)
Check the Order Value & Save

199 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

“If system is not allowing to change the value in Credit Memo request”

Go to the T-Code: V/06

Go to PR00 condition type
Select and Go to Details
In Manual entries maintain “C”
And Value
Save it

Step-2

Go to Change mode of Credit memo Request

T-Code: VA02
Enter
Remover Billing Block (Maintain Blank) and Save

Step-3

Create Credit Memo Invoice

T-Code: VF01
Enter
Check the Value and Save
Go to Change mode of Invoice VF02
Check the Accounting Entry

GOODS ARE TOTALLY DAMAGED AND WHICH ARE NOT IN A POSITION TAKE BACK

Invoice Qty Amount Value Damaged Value

VAXI1530 500 3000 1500000 100 300000

Step-1
Credit Memo Request
Change the Quantity to 100 and Value to Rs. 3,00,000
Order reason
Billing Block Step-2
Remove Billing Block

Step-3
Credit Memo Invoice
Value – Rs. 3,00,000 Accounting Document
Revenue a/c Dr
To Customer a/c Cr

200 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-1

Create Credit Memo Request

T-CODE: VA01
Order type: CR
Mention the Sales Area
Click on Create with the reference
Mention the Invoice number & Enter

To change the value in Credit memo request, double click on Line item
Go to Conditions
Change the Target Quantity to 100
Check the Value in Condition value
Enter
Go Back and GO to Sales Tab
Mention Order Reason (102 Damage in Transit)
Check the Order Value & Save

Step-2

Go to Change mode of Credit memo Request

T-Code: VA02
Enter
Remove Billing Block (Maintain Blank) and Save

Step-3

Create Credit Memo Invoice

T-Code: VF01
Enter
Check the Value and Save
Go to Change mode of Invoice VF02
Check the Accounting Entry

201 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DEBIT MEMO REQUEST

If we want to add some amount to customer’s outstanding without physical movement of goods,
then we do Debit Memo request.

The below scenarios we do Debit memo request.

1. User mistakenly undercharge Previous Invoice.

2. Charging interest to customers for late payment.

Invoice Qty Amount Value Act. Amt Act. Value Under Charged
VAXI1530 500 3000 1500000 4000 2000000 500000

With reference to Invoice

Step-1
Debit Memo Request
Change the Value to Rs. 1,00,000
Order reason
Billing Block Step-2
Remove Bolling Block

Step-3
Debit Memo Invoice
Value – Rs. 1,00,000 Accounting Document
Customer a/c Dr
To a/c Cr
Step-1

Create Debit Memo Request

T-CODE: VA01
Order type: DR
Mention the Sales Area
Click on Create with the reference
Mention the Invoice number & Enter

To change the value in Debit memo request, double click on Line item
Go to Conditions
Check the Value in Condition value
Enter & Go Back
GO to Sales Tab
Mention Order Reason (200 Price discrepancy)
Check the Order Value & Save

202 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-2

Go to Change mode of Debit memo Request

T-Code: VA02
Enter
Remove Billing Block (Maintain Blank) and Save

Step-3

Create Debit Memo Invoice

T-Code: VF01
Enter
Check the Value and Save
Go to Change mode of Invoice VF02
Check the Accounting Entry

203 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

27012022
INVOICE CORRECTION REQUEST
We create invoice Correction request if user mistakenly Over charge/Under Charge previous Invoice.

- We create Invoice correction request mandatorily with the reference to Invoice.

- Each line item from Invoice will be copied as 2 line-items in Invoice correction request
document.
- First Line item is Credit item and Second Line item is Debit item. We can change only Debit
item.
- If User mistakenly Over charge previous Invoice, then decrease the 2nd item value which is
over charged. Then total Net Value will be Over charged value.
- In Invoice correction request, we have to mention order reason.
- Invoice Correction request will be automatically blocked for billing. The authorized person
will go to change mode of invoice of invoice correction request and remove the Billing block.
- Then we create Credit memo Invoice with the reference to Invoice Correction request.
- When we crate Credit Memo Invoice System generates accounting document and the
accounting entry is

Revenue a/c Dr
To Customer a/c Cr

OVER CHARGED

INVOICE: 90040058
MATERIAL QTY AMOUNT VALUE ACT. AMT AVT. VAL OVER CHANRGED
10 VAXI1530 500 3000 15,00,000 2650 1,32,5000 1,75,000

Step-1
Invoice Correction Request
Net Value 175000
10 VAXI1530 1500000 Credit Item
20 VAXI1530 - 1325000 Debit Item

Step-2
Change the Value

Order Reason
Billing Block Step-3
(Go to Change mode of Invoice Correction request and
remove Billing block)

Step-4
Credit Memo Invoice
Net Value: Rs.175000 Accounting Document
Revenue a/c Dr
To Customer a/c Cr

204 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE INVOICE CORRECTION REQUEST

T-CODE: VA01
Order Type : RK
Mention Sales Area
Enter

Enter the reference Billing document number (Invoice no.)

Click on Copy and continue
“Initial net value will be Zero”
Double click on Second Line item
Go to Conditions Tab
Change the Value in Condition Value: (1325000 -)
Enter
“Net value will be Over charged amount”

Go to Sales Tab
Mention Order Reason (200-Price discrepancy)

Go to Change mode of Invoice Correction request

T-CODE: VA02
Remove Billing Block (Make it Blank)
Save

Create Credit Memo Invoice

T-CODE: VF01
Enter
Check the Net Value & Save

205 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

UNDER CHARGED

INVOICE: 90040058
MATERIAL QTY AMOUNT VALUE ACT. AMT AVT. VAL UNDER CHANRGED
10 VAXI1530 500 3000 15,00,000 3400 1700000 2,00,000

Step-1
Invoice Correction Request
Net Value -200000
10 VAXI1530 1500000 Credit Item
20 VAXI1530 -1700000 Debit Item

Step-2
Change the Value

Order Reason
Billing Block Step-3
(Go to Change mode of Invoice Correction request and
remove Billing block)

Step-4
Credit Memo Invoice
Net Value: Rs. -200000 Accounting Document
Customer a/c Dr
To Revenue a/c Cr

- In case of Under charge we have to increase the negative value in Invoice correction request
(Second line-item value), then Net value will become negative.
- While creating Credit Memo Invoice, if net value is negative, then accounting entry will be
Customer a/c Dr
To Revenue a/c Cr

CREATE INVOICE CORRECTION REQUEST

T-CODE: VA01

Order Type : RK
Mention Sales Area
Enter

Enter the reference Billing document number (Invoice no.)

Click on Copy and continue
“Initial net value will be Zero”
Double click on Second Line item
Go to Conditions Tab
Change the Value in Condition Value: (1700000-)
Enter
206 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

“Net value will be Under charged amount”

Go to Sales Tab
Mention Order Reason (200-Price discrepancy)

Go to Change mode of Invoice Correction request

T-CODE: VA02
Remove Billing Block (Make it Blank)
Save

Create Credit Memo Invoice

T-CODE: VF01
Enter
Check the Net Value & Save

Go to the Change Mode

Check the Accounting entry

207 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

21012022
FREE OF CHARGE
(Sample Process)

Free of charge is sending samples to customers without charging.

T-Code Doctype
Free of Charge VA01 FD
No Pricing
No Billing

Delivery

- Free of Charge process is not relevant for pricing.

- Free of Charge is not relevant for Billing.

FREE OF CHARGE PROCESS

Order: T-CODE: VA01

Mention
Order type : FD
Sales Area
Enter
Mention Sold to Party
Enter
Error Message “No pricing procedure could be determined”
To Solve the Error

T-CODE: OVKK

Go to New Entries
Mention the Sales Area

Again, do the Process VA01

Mention Sold to Party
Material & Quantity
(Double click on Line item → Click on Conditions → Check the pricing → It will be Zero)
Order reason: 105 Free of charge sample
Save

Crete Delivery: T-CODE: VL01N

Mention
Shipping Point → Check the Delivery Date → Enter
Do Picking and PGI

208 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SUBSEQUENT DELIVERY FREE OF CHARGE

Whenever Customer return the goods instead of deducting the amount from Customer’s

INVOICE

Step-1 Step-4
Return Order Reference is Mandatory Subsequent Delivery FOC
Step-3 No Pricing T-Code D0ctype
(Go to Change mode of return order and mention Bo Billing VA01 SDF
“Reason for Rejection”)

Step-2 Step-5
Return Delivery Delivery

Return Invoice
(If we want to replace the goods, then don’t create Return Invoice)

- If we want to do SDF process, then we cannot create Return Invoice.

- To Create SDF, we need to go to change mode of return Order and mention
- Reason for rejection controls two things
• If we already create SDF, then system will allow to create Invoice.
• If we already created Return Invoice, then system will not allow to do SDF.
- We create SDF mandatorily with the reference to Return Order.

Step-1

CREATE RETURN ORDER WITH THE REFEFRERNC TO INVOICE

T-CODE: VA01

Document type : RE
Mention Sales Area (H100, H1, H1)
Create with reference
Click on Billing Document
Mention the Invoice number (We can Search)
Enter
Change the Quantity in Order Value (The Return Value)
Mention Order Reason (102 Damaged in transit)
Save

209 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-2

CREATE RETRUN DELIVERY

T-CODE: VL01N

Check the Shipping Point, Date and Order Number & Enter
Go to Picking
Mention Storage Location, Quantity
Click on Post Goods Issue

Step-3

Go to Change Mode of Return Order: VA02

Click on the Last tab – Reason for rejection

Mention Reason for Rejection

Save

Step-4

Create Subsequent Delivery Free of Charge with the reference to Return Order.

Go to the T-Code : VA01

Order type : SDF

Mention the Sales Areas
Enter
Mention the Return Order Number
Click on Copy
Save

Step-5

Create Delivery

T-Code : VL01N

Check Shipping Point, Date, Order Number

Enter
Go to Picking, Enter Pick Quantity and Post Goods Issue

210 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

31012022
QUANTITY CONTRACT

It is an agreement between Company and the Customer for supplying the goods of a particular
quantity and within a specific validity period (Mutual benefit means both the parties should have
benefit). The benefit to customer is extra discounts or less price. The benefit to company is assured
sales.

T-Code Con Type

QUANTITY CONTRACT VA41 QC

Material Qty
10 VAXI15300100BOT 20000

Valid From 01.01.2022 Valid To: 31.12.2022

Release Order Qty T-Code
10 VAXI15300100BOT 300 VA01

Delivery Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 300 VL01N

Invoice Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 300 VF01

If we create Order with the reference to contract, then we call it as Release Order.

CREATE QUANTITY CONTACT

T-Code: VA41

Mention
Contract Type : QC
Sales Area & Enter
Enter
Customer Number: XXXXX
Under Sales Tab
Mention Valid from Valid To
Mention Material & Target Quantity
Enter & save it.

211 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE RELEASE ORDER WITH THE REFEFRENCE TO QUANTITY CONTRACT

T-Code: VA01

Mention
Order type : OR
Sales Area
Click on Create with reference
Click on Contract & Mention the Contract number (Search by F4)
Click on Item Selection
Change the quantity to 300 as per the contract
Click on Copy
Mention the PO Number and Save it

CREATE DELIVERY

T-Code: VL01N

CREATE INVOICE

T-Code: VF01

212 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

VALUE CONTRACT GENERAL

It is an agreement between the company and the customer for supplying the goods after a particular
value and within a specific validity period.

Value contract general is not specific to one material, it is for group of materials.

To Group the Materials for Value Contract General we create Assortment Module

T-Code to create Assortment Module: WSV2

Path to create Assortment Module is

SAP Easy Access → Logistics → Sale & Distribution → Master Data → Products →

Value contract – Assortment Module → WSV2 – Create → Enter

Press Enter

Mention Description : Value Contract Assortment Module

Mention the materials and Save

T-Code Con Type

VALUE CONTRACT GENERAL VA41 WK1
VALUE ASSORTMENT MODULE MATERIAL
10 30000000 10000001628 VAXI1530

Valid From: 01.01.2022 Valid To: 31.12.2022

Release Order Qty T-Code
10 VAXI15300100BOT 600 VA01

Delivery Qty T-Code

10 VAXI15300100BOT 600 VL01N

Invoice Qty T-Code

10 VAXI15300100BOT 600 VF01

213 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE VALUE CONTRACT GENERAL

T-CODE: VA41

Mention
Contract Type : WK1

Sales Area
Enter
Mention
Sold to Party
PO Number
Valid From, Valid To
Target Value: 30000000
Assortment Module Number: XXXXXXXXXX
When we press enter, we will get error message “No pricing procedure could be determined”

To Solve this Error

Go to the T-Code: OVKK

Go to New Entries & Mention

Save it

Create the VA41 again

Mention the Details

Mention the Material Number (Could be any material of ours) after entering Assortment
Module Number
Enter & save it

Create Release Order

Mention
Order Type : OR
Sales Area
Click on Create with Reference
Click on Contract
Mention the Contract Number (Pref F4 to search if needed)
Click on Copy twice
Select the Line
Click on Expand Assortment
Select the Material
Mention the Quantity : 500
Enter & Click on Symbol at top left corner of the Window

214 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go Back (F3)
Finally Click on Copy
Mention PO Number
Double Click on Line Item
Go to Conditions Tab → Scroll Down
Click on Update & Double Click on “B Carry out new pricing”
Save
Create Delivery

Create Invoice

Go to Change mode VA42 and check the Value released Rs. XXXXXX

215 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

01022022
VALUE CONTRACT MATERIAL SPECIFIC
It is an agreement between the Company and the Customer for supplying the goods of a particular
value and within a specific validity period. Value Contract Material specific is specific to Material.

Value Contract

T-Code Contract Type

Value Contract General VA41 WK2

Material Value
10 VAXI15300100BOT 20000000

Release Order Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 200 VA01

Delivery Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 200 VL01N

Invoice Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 200 VF01

CREATE VALUE CONTRACT MATERIAL SPECIFIC IN SYSTEM

T-CODE: VA41

Mention
Contract Type : WK2
Sales Area
Enter
Mention
Customer Number
PO Number
Contract Start, Contract End
Material Number
Target Value
Enter & Save It

216 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE RELEASE ORDER WITH THE REFEFRENCE TO CONTRACT

T-CODE: VA01

Mention
Order Type : OR
Sales Area
Click om Create with reference
Click on Contract
Mention the Contract Number
(Press F4 to find out the Contract numbers if needed)
Select the Contract
Click on Item Selection
Mention
Open Quantity : 200
Select the Line
Click on Copy
Mention the PO Number
Double click on Line item
Go to Conditions
Click on Update
Double click on carryout new pricing
Save

Create Delivery with pick quantity 200

Create Invoice

(When we do PGI we will get error “Posting only possible in periods 2021/10 and 2021/09”)
To solve this error
Go to the T-Code: MMPV
Mention the Company Code and Todays Date
Execute

217 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SCHEDULING AGREEMENT

It is an agreement between company and the customer for supplying the goods of a particular
quantity and within a specific validity period. Scheduling agreement consists of pre-defined delivery
dates.
T-CODE [Link]
SCHEDULING AGREEMENT VA31 DS
Qty
10 VAXI15300100BOT 20000

Schedule Lines Qty

15.02.2022 500
28.02.2022 900
10.03.2022 1200
18.04.2022 1500

Delivery Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 500 VL01N

Invoice Qty T-Code

10 VAXI1530 500 VF01

CREATE SCHEDULING AGREEMENT

T-CODE: VA31
Mention
Schedule Agreement Type : DS
Sales Area
Mention
PO Number
Valid From, Valid To
Material Number :
Target Quantity : 20000
Double Click on Line Items
Go to Schedule Lines
Mention the Dates

Save

Create Delivery : VL01N

Create Invoice : VF01
218 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONSIGNMENT PROCESS

Consignment process is dumping the stock at Customers place and keeping ownership with the
Company. When our customer sells the goods to their customer, then we transfer the ownership to
our customer. The benefit to Customer in Consignment process is No investment and extra
discounts.
The below scenarios Client will do Consignment process

1. Newly Launched products

2. Slow moving materials

Whenever management decides to send the goods on consignment basis, then management will
inform to all the customers. Some customers may accept and some customers may not customers. If
Customer accept, then we do consignment process.

CONSIGNMENT PROCESS

UNRESTRICTED STOCK CONSIGNMENT STOCK

ALKEM 50000 100659 9000
-9000 -7500
41000 1500

T-CODE ORD TYP

CONSIGNMENT FILL UP VA01 CF
CUSTOMER MATERIAL QTY
100659 VBAXI1530 9000
No Pricing
No Billing

Customer Material Qty

100659 VAXI1530 9000

Consignment fill-up means just dumping the stock at customers place and keeping the ownership
with the company.
Consignment Fill-up process is not relevant for pricing.
Consignment fill-up process is not relevant for billing.
When we do delivery in consignment fill-up

- Stock will be reduced from Unrestricted stock.

- Stock will be added to consignment stock.
- Inventory accounting document will not generate because we are not transferring the
ownership to customers.

Consignment Fill-up process is not relevant for pricing.

Consignment Fill-up process is not relevant for Billing.

219 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CREATE CONSIGNMENT FILL-UP

T-CODE: VA01

Order type : CF
Sales Area
Enter
Mention
Customer Number
PO Number
Material
Quantity & save it

Create Delivery: VL01N

Check the Stock : T-Code: MMBE

To Check the Inventory accounting document

Go to Change mode of delivery

Document Flow
Click on Display Document
Click on Accounting Document
“Message Appears as “Material document XXXXX does not include an accounting document”

CONSIGNMENT ISSUE

T-CODE ORD TYPE

VA01 CI

CONSIGNMENT ISSUE
CUSTOMER MATERIAL QTY
100659 VBAXI1530 7500

Delivery Qty T-Code

100659 VAXI1530 7500 VL01N

Invoice Qty T-Code

100659 VAXI1530 7500 VF01

When our customers sell the goods to their customers, then our customers will inform the same to
company. The we do Consignment issue process.
Consignment issue process is relevant for pricing.
Consignment issue process is relevant for billing.
When we do delivery in Consignment issue

- Stock will be reduced from consignment stock

- Inventory accounting document generates because we are transferring the ownership to
customers and the accounting entry is Cost of Goods Sold a/c DR
To Inventory a/c Cr
220 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

02022022

CONSIGNMENT ISSUE PROCESS

T-Code: VA01

Mention
Ord Type : CI
Sales Area
Enter
Mention
Customer
PO Number
Material & Quantity
Enter & save it

Create Delivery (Pick Quantity field is disabled)

Check the Stock

Create Invoice
Check the Accounting Document

CONSIGNMENT RETURNS

When End Customer return the goods to our customer, then our customer will inform the same to
company. Then we do Consignment return process.

T-CODE ORD TYPE

VA01 CONR

CONSIGNMENT ISSUE
CUSTOMER MATERIAL QTY
100659 VBAXI1530 300

Return Delivery Qty T-Code

100659 VAXI1530 300 VL01N

Return Invoice Qty T-Code

100659 VAXI1530 300 VF01

Consignment Return process is relevant for pricing.

Consignment Return process is relevant for Billing.
When we you do Return delivery in Consignment Returns

- Stock will be added to Consignment Stock

- Inventory accounting document generates because we take back the ownership from
customers and the accounting entry is Inventory a/c Dr
To Cost of Goods sold a/c Cr

221 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

T-Code : VA01

Mention
Order Type : CONR
Sales Area
Enter
Mention
Customer Number
PO Number
Material Number
Quantity
Mention Order Reason (102 Damaged in transit)
Save
Create Return Delivery
T-Code: VL01N
Mention
Shipping Point
Date
Do Picking (Pick Quantity will be disabled in Returns)
Do PGI

Create Return Invoice

T-Code: VF01
Enter & Save
We will get an error message “No billing documents were generated. See Log”
Go to Edit and see Log (Shift+F1)
“The document is blocked for billing”

To Solve the error

Go to the change mode of Consignment Returns (VA02)
Remove Billing Block
Create Return Invoice
Enter & Save
Check the Stock after Return Delivery (T-Code: MMBE)
Check VL02N Inventory accounting document

Click on Document Flow → GI rcpt. cust. consgmt → Display document → Accounting document

222 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONSIGNMENT PICKUP

When Our Customer requests to take back the consignment goods, then we do Consignment Pickup
process.

T-CODE ORD TYPE

VA01 CP

CONSIGNMENT PICKUP
CUSTOMER MATERIAL QTY
100659 VBAXI1530 1800
No Pricing
No Billing

Return Delivery Qty T-Code

100659 VAXI1530 1800 VL01N

Consignment Pickup process is not relevant for pricing.

Consignment pickup process is not relevant for billing.
When we do return delivery in consignment pickup

- Stock will be reduced from Consignment Stock and stock will be added to Unrestricted stock.
- Inventory accounting document will not generate.

PROCESS

Consignment Pickup

T-Code: VA01

Mention
Order Type : CP
Sales Area & Enter
Mention
Customer
PO Number
Material
Quantity
Save

Return Delivery

T-Code: VL01N

Enter
Do Picking (Pick Quantity will be disabled) and PGI
Check the Stock (MMBE)
Check VL02N Inventory accounting document

Click on Document Flow → GI rcpt. cust. consgmt → Display document → Accounting document

223 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. Why we are doing Delivery in Consignment issue?

To Reduce the stock from Consignment stock
To Stock transfer the ownership to customers.

Q. Why we are doing Return Delivery in Consignment Returns?

To add the stock the stock to Consignment stock
To take back the ownership from Customers.

224 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

07022022
SALES DOCUMENT TYPES CONTROLS

T-CODE: VOV8

PATH

SPRO → SALES & DISTRIBUTION → SALES → SALES DOCUMENTS → SALES DOCUMENTS HEADER →
DEFINE SALES DOCUMENT TYPES

CREATE SALES DOCUMENT

Go to Position
Search for Document type
Click on Copy
Change the Name
Save

SD Document category:

This field controls the functioning of the sales document. i.e., Enquiry, Quotation or Sales Order etc.

Doctype Doc Category

INQUIRY IN “A”
QUOTATION QT “B”
RUSH ORDER RO “C”
CASH SALE CS “C”
RETURNS RE “H”
CREDIT MEMO CR “G”
DEBIT MEMO DR “L”
INVOICE CORRECTION RK “K”
FREE OF CHARGE FD “I”
SUB DEL FR. OF CHAR SDF “I”
COSIGNMENT FILLUP CF “C”
CONSIGNMENT ISSUE CI “C”
CONSIGN. RETURNS CONR “H”
[Link] CP “C”
QTY CONTRACT QC “G”
VAL. CONTRACT. GEN WK1 “G”
[Link]. MAT WK2 “G”
SCH. AGREEMENT DS “E”
ITEM PROPOSAL PV “D”

225 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Indicator:

We maintain indicator only for RK. For RK we maintain indicator as “D”. Indicator “D” controls that
each line item will be copied as 2-line items in invoice correction request document.

Sales document block:

If we maintain this, then System will not allow to create the Sales document with that document
type.

If we don’t want to use any document type, then go to that document type and maintain sales
document block “X”

NUMBER SYSTEMS

The T-Code to define the number ranges for sales document is VN01
Click on Change Intervals
Create the range
Number range internal assignment:

Number range external assignment:

Enter the number manually in Sales order

Item no. increment

This field controls how the line-item number should be incremented in Sales document.

Sub-Item increment

This field controls how the Sub item number should be incremented in Sales document.
The below scenarios we will have sub-item.
226 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

- BOM (Bill of Material)

Bill of Material means a product having Sub components.
E.g., 10 Computer
11 CPU
12 Monitor
13 Keyboard
14 Mouse
- Free Goods
Free Goods offering the goods free of cost in relation to main item.
- Material Determination
Substituting one material in place of other materials.
- Cross Selling
Selling additional products along with the main product.

GENERAL CONTROL

Reference mandatory

This field controls whether any preceding document is required or not to create a sales document. In
standard RK and SDF will have reference mandatory.

RK reference mandatory is M → M means with the reference to billing document.

SDF reference mandatory is C → C means with the reference to sales order.
Blank means no reference required
A with the reference to an inquiry
B With the reference to quotation
C with the reference to quotation
E Scheduling agreement reference
G with the reference to quantity contract
M with the reference to billing document

227 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

10022022

Check division

This fields controls how system should responds if the division in the Header deviates from division
in the item. i.e., whether to warning message/Error message /no message.

Check division
Blank - No message
1 - Warning message
2 - Error message

SALES ORDER
T-CODE VA01
ORDER TYPE HOR

Sales org H100 MATERIAL MASTER

Dist. Channel H1 Division H1
Division H2 Header Division

Customer 100659
Item no Material Item division
10 VAXI1530 H1

Process

T-Code: VA01
Mention
Order Type : HOR
Sales Org : H100
Dist. Channel : H1
Division : H2
Enter
Mention the Customer (Search with the Division H2)
Mention the PO Number
Enter (Error: No pricing procedure could be determined)
Go to OVKK

228 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Create Order again

Mention the Material & Quantity
Double click on Line item
Go to Sales B Tab
Check the Item Division: H1
(Check the Material Master for the Division of the material in MM03)
Here the division is getting copied from the material master.

Example:

Some clients they take orders division specific. In that case we maintain check division as “2”

Item division

If we check this, then the line-item division in sales document will be copied from Material master.

If we uncheck this, then the line-item division in sales document will be copied from Header division.

11022022
Read info record

If we check this system will read CMIR and system will determine into sales document.
If we uncheck this system will not read CMIR and system will not determine it into sales document.

Check purchase order number

If we maintain this, then while creating Sales order system will check the combination of customer and PO
number in previous orders. If the same combination exists, then system will warning message.

This field will help to restrict duplication of sales orders.

We maintain Check purchase order number as “A”. A means check whether the purchase order number is
already exists.

229 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Enter PO number

If we check this, then while creating sales order if PO number is blank, then system will copy sales order
number as PO number.

Commitment date

If we maintain commitment date, then system will display one extra field schedule line tab i.e., Committed
quantity. Any order with committed quantity will be given first preference while delivering the goods to
customers.

If we maintain commitment date, then system will not allow to change delivery dates and confirmed quantities
from that order.

Probability

This field controls the chances of converting the document into order (This field controls the chances
of converting enquiry & quotation into order)

The field probability is applicable only for Inquiry and Quotation.

For Inquiry we maintain probability as 30% and for Quotation we maintain probability as 70%.

Q. Where is the control that probability field is enabled only for Inquiry and Quotation?

Ans. Document category A & B

230 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Check credit limit

This field controls whether to go for simple credit check or automatic credit check.
If we want to go for simple credit check, then maintain either A/B/C.
If we want to go for automatic credit check, then maintain “D”

A → Run simple credit check give warning message

B → Run simple credit check give error message
C → Run simple credit check and delivery block
D → Credit management: Automatic credit control

In simple credit check if customer’s credit limit exceeds, then system will block only at order level.

In automatic credit check if customer’s credit limit exceeds, then system swill block at order
level/delivery level/PGI level.

Credit group

This field is applicable only for automatic credit check. This field controls which transaction should
be blocked if the customer’s credit limit exceeds. i.e., / Order/Delivery/PGI

231 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

16022022

TRANSACTION FLOW

Screen sequence group

This field controls which screen should be displayed while creating sales document.

Incompletion Procedure

It is a procedure which consists of list of mandatory fields which user has to enter while creating
sales document. If any of the mandatory field is missing, then either system will not allow to save
the sales document or even system allow to save, the status of the document will be incomplete and
system will not to proceed further.

INCOMPLETION PROCEDURE

PO no
Terms of Payment
Incoterms 1
Incoterms 2
E.g., Status will be incomplete
As terms of payment is missing
SALES ORDER

Terms of Payment “___“

232 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Transaction group

TRANSACTION GROUP T-CODE

INQUIRY 1 VA11
QUOTATION 2 VA21
ORDER 0 VA01
CONTRACT 4 VA41
SCH. AGREEMENT 3 VA31
ITEM GROUP 8 VA51

Transaction group controls the T-CODE of the sales document type.

Document pricing procedure

This field is one of the parameters to determine pricing procedure in sales document.

The pricing procedure determine based on Sales area, document pricing procedure and customer
pricing procedure.

The T-CODE for pricing procedure is OVKK

DOCUMENT PRICING PROCEDURE

IN/QT/OR/RO/CS/RE/CR/RK/DR/CF/CI/CONR/CP/QC/DS A
FD/SDF/PV C
WK1/WK2 Y

233 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Status profile

It is a Order release process. after creating sales order by end user, the order will be sent to
authorized people to cross check and release. If they release the order, then only system will allow
to create delivery and invoice.

End User Authorized person (Manager)

Order Cross check the order
Release the Order

End User
Delivery

End User
Invoice

Alternate Sales document type 1/Alternate sale document type 2

This will help to shift the sales documents from one document type to another.

To practice alternate sales document type 1 & 2

Copy OR in VOV8
Mention
Sales document type: : HRO RUSH ORDER
Immediate Delivery :X
Shipping conditions : 10
Enter & Save
Go to HRO
Mention Alternate sales document type : OR
Got to OR
Mention Alternate sales document type : HRO
We can also shift the document in change mode but for that
number ranges should be same in Bothe the document
types.
Check the document type

234 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

17022022

Variant (Transaction variant)

This will help to control the sales document. Ie., whether to make the filed Mandatory / Optional /
display / suppress. The T-Code to create Variant is SHDO
Transaction Code : VA01
Mention the Transaction Variant : Z730 Batch
Press Enter
Click on Create

Display Range

This field controls whether to display all items or only main items in case of
sub items.

The below scenarios we will have sub items

BOM (Bill of Materials)
Free Goods
Material determination
Cross selling etc.

Display range
UALL means it will display all items
UHAU means which will display only main items

Create BOM (Bill of Material)

Item Cat. Group

COMPUTER ERLA
CPU NORM
Monitor NORM
Keyboard NORM
Mouse NORM

235 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Create Material

T-Code: MM01

Mention

Material : HCOMPUTER, HCPU, HMONITOR, HKEYBOARD, HMOUSE

(in Sales org 2 tab Item category group for HCOMPUTER is ERLA and for component
items it is NORM)

CREATE BOM (Bill of Material)

T-CODE: CS01
Enter
Mention
Material : HCOMPUTER
Plant : H200
BOM Usage : 5 (Sales & Distribution)
Enter
Mention

Save

MAINTAIN PRICE

T-Code: VK11

Condition type: PR00

Select Material with release status (Material combination)
Enter
Mention
Sales Org : H100
Dist. Channel : H1
Mention

CREATE ORDER
T-CODE: VA01
Create Order for HCOMPUTER
Check the line item details we will get all components as we maintain Display range as UALL
236 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Now change Display range to UHAU, then we will not get components
Maintain Stock for all items then create Order, Delivery, PGI
Here Main item stock will be reduced.

Change the Item category for Main Item (HCOMPUTER) as LUMS, then we will get price for
components only
Here component stock will be reduced

F Code for over view screen

This field controls which tab should be displayed by default when we enter into sales document.

Quotation messages

If we maintain this, then while creating sales order system checks for this customer is there any open
quotations existing or not.
If YES, then system will propose the list.
We maintain quotation messages as either “A” or “B”
A means check at header level (Check at customer level)
B means check at item level (Check at customer and material combination)

Example:
25.01.2022 Customer
2000149 Quotation Valid for 30 days

Customer 100659

Item Material Qty Amount

10 VAXI1530 100 3000 Purchase order

17.02.2022
Sales Order
Customer 100569

237 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Create quotation
T-Code: VA21
Mention
Quotation type : QT
Sales Area

Outline agreement messages (Contracts)

If we maintain this, then while creating sales order system checks for this customer is there any open
contracts existing or not.

If YES, then system will propose the list.

Incomplete messages

This field controls whether to save incomplete document or not.

If we check this, then system will not allow to save incomplete document.
If we uncheck this, then system will to save incomplete document.

238 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

18022022

SHIPPING

Delivery type

If we maintain delivery type here, then system automatically determines it while creating delivery.

Process:
Create Order (VA01) and Delivery (VL01N)
Click on Go to → Header
Check the delivery type.

Delivery Type
Standard LF
Cash Sale BV
Return LR
Delivery W/O order ref LO
STO (Stock transport order) NL
STO Returns NLR
Intercompany STO NLCC
Intercompany STO returns NCR

Delivery block

If we maintain delivery block, then system will automatically block the order for delivery. Then
authorized person has to remove the delivery block. Then only system will allow to create delivery.

Process:

Create Order (VA01) → Create Delivery (VL01N) → Error message

→ go to change mode (VA02) → remove the delivery block (authorized person)
Delivery block is maintained as per the client requirement.

239 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Immediate Delivery

If we maintain immediate delivery, then while creating sales order system automatically creates
delivery in the background.
We maintain immediate delivery only for Cash sale (CS), Rush order (RO)
We maintain immediate delivery as ‘X’ or ‘A’ for Cash sale and Rush order.
X means Create delivery immediately if quantity confirmed for today.
A means Create delivery immediately even if quantity is confirmed in future.
Blank means create delivery separately.

Shipping Conditions

If we maintain shipping conditions in sales document type, then it overwrites the shipping conditions
in customer master while determining shipping point into sales document.

CS RO Rem. Doc types Customer 100659

Shipping Conditions 10 10 Blank Shipping conditions “01”

Shipping Point determination

[Link] Loading Group Plant [Link]
01 0001 H200 H202
01 0003 H200 H201
10 0001 H200 H203
10 0003 H200 H203

Oder OR Oder RO
Customer 100659 “01” Customer 100659 “01”
Material VAXI1530 “0001” Material VAXI1530 “0001”
Plant H200 Plant H200

Shipping Point H202 Shipping Point H203

Oder CS
Customer 100659 “01”
Material VAXI1530 “0001”
Plant H200

Shipping Point H203

240 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

BILLING

Delivery related billing type/Order related billing type

If we maintain billing type here, then system automatically determines it while creating invoice.

Del Rel Billing Ord Rel Billing

Standard Process 
Return Process 
[Link] Process 
Invoice Correction 
[Link] Process 
Rush Order Process 
Cash Sale Process 
Billing Type
Standard F2
Cash Sale BV
Return RE
[Link] G2
[Link] L2
Proforma Ord Rel F5
Proforma Del Rel F8
Inv Cancellation S1
Ret Inv Cancellation S2
Intercompany Inv IV
Intercompany [Link] IG

Billing Block

If we maintain billing block, then order will be automatically blocked for billing. Then authorized
person has to cross check and remove the block. Then only system will allow to create invoice.

The below document types will have billing block.

241 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Doc type
[Link] 08
Inv Correction 08
Ret Order 08
Consignment Returns 08
[Link] 09

Condition type line items

Here we maintain either EK01 or EK02

EK01 & EK02 are product cost condition types.

Product cost = Direct Cost + Indirect Cost

(Manufacturing Cost) (Salaries, Rent, Running expenses, Admin Exp, Advt)

If selling price is totally dependent on cost, then here we maintain EK01.

If cost is only statistical, i.e., selling price is not directly dependent on cost, then here we maintain
EK02.

242 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

21022022

Billing Plan Type

We have 2 types of billing plans

1. Periodic billing
2. Milestone billing

Period Billing means billing based on regular intervals. E.g., Monthly billing, Quarterly billing etc.
in service contracts and rental contracts we will have periodic billing.

Milestone billing (activity-based billing) means billing based on work done. All projects will have
milestone projects E.g., Infrastructure projects, Software projects, irrigation projects etc.

REQUESTED DELIVERY DATE/PRICING DATE/PURCHASE ORDER DATE

Lead time in days

If we mention number of days here, then system will consider that while proposing requested
delivery date in sales order.

Propose delivery date

If we check this, then system will automatically propose requested delivery date while creating sales
order.

If we uncheck propose delivery date, then system will not propose requested delivery date
automatically while creating sales order. User has to enter it manually.

243 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Propose PO date

If we check this, then system will propose PO date automatically while creating Sales document.

If we check propose PO date, then system will automatically propose today’s date as PO date while
creating sales order. IF we uncheck propose PO date.

If we uncheck Propose PO date, then system will not propose PO date in sales order. User has to
enter it manually.

Date type

This field controls in which format the delivery date has to be proposed. i.e., Day format/Week
format/Month format

Proposal for pricing date

Pricing date will help to determine the valid price on that particular date

i.e., based on today’s date or based on requested delivery date.

‘A’ means pricing date will be based on requested delivery date.

‘Blank’ means pricing date will be based on today’s date.

244 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

22022022 DIFFERENCES IN SD CONTROLS

IN QT
SD Doc Category “A” “B”
Probability 30% 70%
Transaction Group 1 2

OR RO
Immediate Delivery “ “ “X”
Shipping Condition “ “ “10”

RO CS
Delivery Type LF BV
Billing Type F2 BV

OR RE
Document Category “C” “H”
Delivery Type LF LR
Billing Type F2 RE
Billing Block “ “ “08”

CR RK
Indicator “ “ “D”
Reference Mandatory “ “ “M”

CR DR
Document Category “K” “L”
Billing Block “08” “09”
Billing type G2 L2

FD SDF
Reference Mandatory “ “ “C”

OR FD
Document Category “C” “I”
Billing type F2 “ “
Document Pricing Procedure “A” “C”

WK1 WK2
Screen sequence group WK WK1

OR DS
Document Category “C” “E”
Transaction Group “0” “3”
Screen sequence group AU LP

QC WK1
Document Pricing Procedure “A” “Y”
Screen sequence group LP WK

245 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SCENARIOS

1. Clients’ requirement is they want to restrict duplication of sales orders. Where is the
control?
Check Purchase order number maintain “A”

2. Clients’ requirement is they want to take order Division specific. Where is the control?
Check Item Division maintain Check division as “2”

3. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to use CMIR, where is the control?
Uncheck Read info record

4. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to save incomplete document, where is the control?
Check Incomplete messages

5. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to change Payment terms and Incoterms while
creating Sales order.
Maintain Variant

6. Clients’ requirement is after creating sales order by end user the order should be sent to
authorized person to cross check and release.
Status profile

7. Clients’ requirement is in some situations user wants to shift the sales document from one
document type to another.
Alternate Sales document type “1” and Alternate Sales document “2”

8. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to display sub-items in sales order

Maintain Display range as UHAU

9. Clients’ requirement is they want to go for automatic credit check

Maintain Credit limit as “D”

10. Clients’ requirement is system should propose delivery date after 10 days from the date of
order
Mention Lead time in days as “10”

11. Clients’ requirement is system should always consider todays price.

Maintain Proposal pricing date as Blank

12. Clients’ requirement is system should display the delivery dates in week format
Maintain date type “2”

13. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to use RK document

Go to RK maintain Sales document block as “X”

246 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

23022022

QUESTIONS IN SALES DOCUMENT CONTROL

1. What is the purpose of indicator RK?

Each line item will be copied as 2-line items in Invoice correction request document.

2. What happens if I maintain sales document block as “X”?

System will not allow to create sales document with that document type

3. What is the purpose of Check division?

This field controls how system should respond if the division in the header deviates from
division in the item. i.e.’ whether to give warning message or Error message or No message.

4. What happens if I uncheck item division?

The line-item division in sales document will be copied from Header division.

5. What happens if uncheck Read info record?

System will not read CMIR and system will not determine it into sales document.

6. What happens if I maintain check purchase order number?

While creating sales order, System will check the combination of the Customer and Purchase
order number in previous orders. If the same combination exists then system will give
warning message.

7. What is the purpose of check purchase order number?

It will restrict the duplication of Sales orders.

8. What happens if check enter PO number?

While creating Sales order if PO number is blank, then system will copy sales order number as
PO number.

9. What happens if I maintain commitment date?

System will display one extra field in schedule line tab. i.e., Committed quantity. And any
order with committed quantity will be given first preference while delivering the goods to
customers.

10. What is the purpose of check credit limit?

It controls whether to go for simple credit check or automatic credit check.

11. Where is the control for probability field is enabled only for Inquiry and Quotation?
Document Category “A” and “B”

12. What is the purpose of display range?

This field controls whether to display all items or only main items incase sub items.

247 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

13. What is the purpose of document pricing procedure?

This field is one of the parameters to determine pricing procedure in sales document.

14. What is purpose of transaction group?

This field controls the T-0Code of the sales document type.

15. What happens if I maintain quotation messages?

While creating Sales order system checks for this customer any existing open quotations or
not. If Yes then system will propose the list.

16. What happens if I propose outline agreement messages?

While creating Sales order, for this customer system will check for any existing open
contracts. If Yes then system will propose the list.

17. What happens if I check incomplete messages?

While creating sales order System will not allow to save incomplete document.

18. What is the purpose of Alternate sales document type 1 and 2?

This field help to shift the sales document from one document type to another.

19. What is the purpose of Variant?

This will help to control the fields in Sales document. i.e., whether to make the field
mandatory/optional/display/suppress.

20. What is the T-Code to create Variant?

SHD0

21. What is the purpose of Status profile?

After creating the Seals Order by End user, the order will sent to
If that person releases the order, then only system will allow to perform Delivery and invoice.

22. What is the difference between Immediate delivery X and A?

23. Which document type we maintain Billing block?

Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Invoice correction, Returns and Consignment returns.

24. What happens if I maintain lead time in days?

System will consider those dates while proposing requested delivery date.

25. What is the purpose of credit group?

This field controls which transaction should be blocked if the credit limit exceeds. I.e.,
Order/Delivery/PGI.

26. What happens if I maintain immediate delivery as X or A?

System will automatically create delivery in the backend.

248 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

24022022

ITEM CATEGORY
Item data is a data which is applicable to particular LINE item in Sales data.

The source of Item data is

- Material Master
- CMIR
- Condition Master
- Some part of Configuration Data
- Some part of Control Data

Item data will be controlled by item category

The table for Item data is VBAP

STRUCTURE OF SALES DOCUMENT

TABLE Source

Material data
Item data CMIR
VBAP Condition master
Item category Some part of configuration data
Some part of control data

DOC Type ITEM CATEGORY

INQUIRY IN AFN
QUOTATION QT AGN
ORDER OR TAN
RUSH ORDER RO TAN
CASH SALE CS BVN
RETURNS RE REN
CREDIT MEMO CR G2N
INVOICE CORRECTION RK G2N
DEBIT MEMO DR L2N
FREE OF CHARGE FD KLN
SUBSEQUENT DELIVERY FOC SDF KLN
CONSIGNMENT FILLUP CF KBN
CONSIGNMENT ISSUE CI KEN
CONSIGNMENT RETURNS CONR KRN
CONSIGNMENT PICKUP CP KAN
QUANTITY CONTRACT QC KMN
VALUE CONTRACCT GENERAL WK1 WKN
VALUE CONTRACT MATERIAL SPECIFIC WK2 WKN
SCHEDULING AGREEMENT DS LPN
ITEM PROPOSAL PV PVN

249 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ITEM CATEGORY
FREE GOODS TANN
THIRD PARTY TAS
THIRD PARTY RETURNS TASG
IPO TAB
MAKE TO ORDER TAK
CONFIGURABLR MATERIAL TAC
SERVICE MATERIAL TAD
DELIVERY W/O ORDER REF DLN
TEXT ITEM TATX
VALUE ITEM TAW
STO (Stock Transport Order) NLN
STO RETURNS NLRN
INTERCOMPANY STO NLC
INTERCOMPANY STO RETURNS NCRN

BOM HEADER PRICING

COMPUTER TAQ
CPU TAE
MONITOR TAE
KEYBOARD TAE
MOUSE TAE
BOM HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM TAQ
BOM HEADER PRICING SUB ITEM TAE

BOM HEADER PRICING

COMPUTER TAP
CPU TAN
MONITOR TAN
KEYBOARD TAN
MOUSE TAN
BOM ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM TAP
BOM ITEM PRICING SUB ITEM TAN

MATERIAL DETERMINATION HEADER PRICING

X TAX
Y TAPS
MATERIAL DETERMINATION HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM TAX
MATERIAL DETERMINATION HEADER PRICING SUB ITEM TAPS

MATERIAL DETERMINATION ITEM PRICING

X TAPA
Y TAN
MATERIAL DETERMINATION ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM TAPA
MATERIAL DETERMINATION ITEM PRICING SUB ITEM TAN

250 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

T-CODE to define ITEM CATEGORIES: VOV7

PATH:

SPRO → SAP REF IMG → SALES & DISTRIBUTION → SALES → SALES DOCUMENTS → SALES
DOCUMENT ITEM → DEFFINE ITEM CATEGORIES

ITEM CATEGORY CONTROLS

BUSINESS DATA

Item Type:

This field controls the functioning of the line item. i.e., whether it is standard item or Value item or
Text item or Packing item.

Blank - Standard Item

A - Value Item
B - Text Item
C - Packing Item

The Item category for Value item is TAW.

The Item Category for text item is TATX.

Standard Item

It is the item which we sell to customers whether it is tangible or intangible.

Value Item

It is the item which consist of some value and which we deliver to customers without
charging. E.g., Gift Vouchers, Gift Coupons etc.

Text Item

It is the item which consist of some information and which we deliver to customers without
charging. E.g., User manuals, Brochures etc.

Packing Item

It is the item which will be used to pack the main item. E.g., Cartons, Box, Bag, Bottle etc.

251 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

25022022

Business Item:

This field controls whether to change the business data at Item level or not.

Business data is the data which copies into Sales document from
CUSTOMER MASTER → Sales tab and Billing tab

Business data will be copied into Header data and Item data.

The table for Business data is VBKD.

SALES DOCUMENT CUSTOMER MASTER

HEADER DATA SALES Tab

ITEM DATA BILLING TAB

If We check business item then system will allow to change the business data at Item Level.

If we uncheck Business item then system will not allow to change the business data at item level.

The Business data fields at item level will be disabled.

Scheduled Line Allowed:

If we check this then system will determine Schedule line tab into Sales document.

If we uncheck this then system will not determine Schedule lines tab into Sales document.

(Order quantity field will be disabled after entering the material)

252 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

The below item categories Schedule lines category is unchecked.

1. G2N (Credit memo request)

2. L2N (Debit memo request)
3. KMN (Quantity Contract)
4. WKN (Value Contract)
5. TATX (Text item)

Item Relevant for Delivery:

This field is applicable only for text item and Value item.

If Text item (TATX) and Value item (TAW) is relevant for delivery, then we check Item Relevant for
delivery.

Returns:

If we check returns, then system identifies that the goods are coming in and accounting entry
becomes reverse.

The below item categories we check returns

1. REN (Returns)
2. G2N (Credit Memo)
3. KRN (Consignment Returns)
4. KAN (Consignment Pickup)
5. TASG (Third party returns)
6. NLRN (STO Returns)
7. NCRN (Intercompany STO Returns)

253 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Questions:

What happens if I check Returns for item category TAN?

Document Value will be negative and accounting entry will be reverse.

My Document value is showing in negative? What could be the reason?

Returns checked for item category TAN.

Weight / Volume Relevant:

If we check this then system will calculate the weight and determine it into Sales document.

If we uncheck this, then system will not calculate the weight and system will not determine it into
Sales document.

Unit Weight
VAXI1530 Base Unit BT 1 BT 250 gm
Sales Unit CAR 1 CAR 500 BT 1 CAR 125000 gm

Order
Weight
VAXI1530 150 CAR 18750000 gm

System will display the weight in Item data → Shipping tab

Credit Active:

This field Controls whether to update the line-item value into Credit management or not.
If you check this, then only the line-item value will be updated into Credit management.
254 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

If you uncheck this, then the line-item value will not be updated into Credit management.
The below item categories will have Credit active unchecked

1. AFN (Inquiry)
2. AGN (Quotation)
3. BVN (Cash Sale)
4. REN (Returns)
5. G2N (Credit Memo)
6. KLN (Free of Charge)
7. KRN (Consignment Returns)
8. KBN (Consignment Fill up)
9. KAN (Consignment Pickup)
10. KMN (Quantity Contract)
11. WKN (Value Contract)
12. TASG (Third party returns)
13. TATX (Text item)
14. TAW (Value item)
15. NLN (STO)
16. NLRN (STO Returns)
17. NLC (Intercompany STO)
18. NCRN (Intercompany STO returns)
19. TAE (BOM Header pricing sub-item)
20. TAP (BOM item pricing main item)
21. TAPS (Material determination Header Pricing sub-item)
22. TAPA (Material determination item pricing main item)
23. PVN (Item proposal)

The below item categories will have Credit active checked

1. TAN (Standard Item)

2. L2N (Debit Memo)
3. KEN (Consignment issue)
4. LPN (Scheduling agreement)
5. TANN (Free goods)
6. TAS (Third party)
7. TAB (IPO)
8. TAK (Make to order)
9. TAC (Configurable Material)
10. TAD (Service)
11. DLN (Delivery without order reference)
12. TAQ (BOM Header pricing main item)
13. TAX (Material determination Header pricing main-item)

255 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

01032022

Determine Cost:

This field controls whether to determine Cost condition type into Sales document or not.

If we check this, then only system will determine the cost condition type (VPRS) into Sales
document.

If we uncheck this, then system will not determine the Cost condition type (VPRS) into Sales
document.

Completion Rule:

This field controls “When the status of the line item should be completed”.

256 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Item Cat
Inquiry AFN
Completion Rule “A” Item Completed with the First reference
INQUIRY
10 VAXI1530 100 Qty Open Completed

20 VAXI3040 200 Qty Open

Item Cat
Quotation AGN
Completion Rule “B” Item Completed after full quantity has been referenced
QUOTATION
10 VAXI1530 35 Qty Open Being
Processed

ORDER
10 VAXI1530 20 Qty

CARTON Item Cat

Qty Cont KMN

Completion Rule “C” Item Completed after target quantity is fully referenced
Qty Contract
Target Qty Status Status
10 VAXI1530 10000 Qty Open Being
Processed

Release
Order
10 VAXI1530 20 Qty

257 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Item Cat
Val. Cont WKN
Completion Rule “E” Item Completed after target value is fully referenced
Val Contract
Target Val Status Status
10 VAXI1530 20000000 Qty Open Being
Processed

Release
Order
10 VAXI1530 500 Qty

Completion Rule is applicable only for the following

Completion Rule
INQUIRY AFN A Item Completed after first reference
QUOTATION AGN B Item completed after full quantity has been referenced
QUANTITY CONTRACT KMN C Item completed after full value has been referenced
VALUE CONTRACT WKN E Item completed after target value is fully referenced

Completion Rule is applicable only between Sales document to Sales document.

Special Stock:

This field controls while doing Delivery which stock should consider.

Special Stock Order

“ “ : Unrestricted Stock Unrestricted Stock

“E” : Sales Order Stock Delivery Sales Order Stock
“W” : Consignment Stock Consignment Stock

258 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

The below Item categories will have special stock “E” (Sales Order Stock)
Item Category
Make to Order TAK
Special Stock “E” Sales order stock

Item Category
IPO TAB
Special Stock “E” Sales order stock

Item Category
MTO (Make to Order) TAK
Special Stock “E” Sales order stock

The Special Stock indicator “E” in TAK item category controls that when we do Delivery in
Make to Order system will consider only Sales order stock.

Item Category
IPO (Indi Pur. Order) TAB
Special Stock “E” Sales order stock

The Special Stock indicator “E” in TAB item category controls that when we do Delivery in
IPO process system will consider only Sales order stock.

The below item categories will have special stock “W” Consignment stock.

Item Category
Consignment issue KEN
Special Stock “W” Consignment stock

Item Category
Consignment Returns KRN
Special Stock “W” Consignment stock

Item Category
Consignment issue KEN
Special Stock “W” Consignment stock

The special stock “W” in KEN item category controls that, when we do delivery in
consignment issue system will consider only Consignment stock.

Item Category
Consignment Returns KRN
Special Stock “W” Consignment stock

259 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

02032022

The special stock “W” in KRN item category controls that, when we do return delivery in
consignment returns system will consider only Consignment stock.
Billing Relevance:

This field controls whether the item is relevant for billing or not. And it also controls whether the
item is relevant for Delivery related billing or order related billing.

Billing Relevance
“ “ Not relevant for billing
“A” Delivery related billing
“B” Order related billing

The below item categories will have Billing relevance blank “ “ (Not Relevant for billing)

INQUIRY AFN
QUOTATION AGN
FREE OF CHARGE KLN
QUANTITY CONTRACT KMN
VALUE CONTRACT WKN
CONSIGNMENT FILLUP KBN
CONSIGNMNET PICKUP KAN
TEXT ITEM TATX
BOM HEADER PRICING SUB ITEM TAE
BOM ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM TAP
MAT DET HEADER PRICING SUB ITEM TAPS
MAT DET ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM TAPA
STO NLN
STO RETURNS NLRN

The below item categories will have Billing relevance “A” (Delivery Related Billing)
STANDARD TAN
IPO TAB
CONSIGNMENT ISSUE KEN
SCHEDULING AGREEMENT LPN
MAKE TO ORDER TAK
CONFIGURABLE MATERIAL TAC
DELIVERY W/O ORDER REFERENCE DLN
BOM HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM TAQ
260 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MAT DET HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM TAX

INTERCOMPANY STO NLC
INTERCOMPANY STO RETURNS NCRN
FREE GOODS TANN
VALUE ITEM TAW
The below item categories will have Billing relevance “B” (Order related billing status according to
order quantity)

CASH SALE BVN

RETURNS REN
CONSIGNMENT RETURNS KRN
SERVICE TAD

The below item categories will have Billing relevance “C” (Order related billing status according to
target quantity)

CREDIT MEMO G2N

DEBIT MEMO L2N

The below item categories will have Billing relevance “F” (Order related billing status according to
MIRO)

THIRD PARTY TAS

THIRD PARTY RETURNS TASG

Billing relevance “F” controls that without MIRO system will not allow to create invoice to customer.

1. ORDER 6. MIRO (Vendor Invoice / Invoice Verification / Incoming Invoice)

MIRO (Movement in Receipt Out)

7. Invoice to Customer 2. PR

3. PO

4. Vendor

5. Delivery

261 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

For third party with shipping notification, we maintain Billing relevance as “G”.

“G” means Order related billing status according to MIGO

1. ORDER 6. MIGO (Goods Receipt)

MIGO (Movement in Goods Out)

7. Invoice to Customer 2. PR

3. PO

4. Vendor

5. Delivery

Billing relevance “G” controls that without MIGO System will not allow to create invoice to
customer.

The below item categories can have Billing Relevance “D” (Relevant for Proforma Invoice)

FREE OF CHARGE KLN

CONSGINMENT FILLUP KBN
STO NLN

Billing Relevance “K” (Delivery related invoice for partial quantity), It will help to create partial
invoice.

Billing Relevance “M” (Delivery-related invoices-no zero qtys (incl main batch item)), It will help to
restrict zero quantity line items in invoice in case of Batch management.

262 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

03032022
Billing Plan type:

If we maintain Billing plan type in Sales document type controls, then it will be applicable to total
document.
If we maintain Billing plan type in Item category type controls, it will be applicable to particular line
item.

Billing block:

We have Billing block in Sales document type controls also.

If we maintain Billing block in Sales document type controls, then it will block total document for
invoice.
If we maintain Billing block in Item Category type controls, then it will block only that particular line
item for Billing.

Pricing:

263 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

This field controls whether the item is relevant for Pricing or not. And it also controls whether the
item is relevant for Normal pricing or Free-goods pricing.

PRICING
“ “ Not Relevant for Pricing
“X” Relevant for Pricing
“B” Free goods pricing (100% Discount)

If Pricing is “B”, then system will determine R100 condition type and make the Free Goods item
value Zero.

The below item categories Pricing is Blank “ “ (Not Relevant for Pricing)

Free of Charge KLN

Consignment Fill-up KBN
Consignment Pick-up KAN
BOM Header pricing Sub-item TAE
BOM Item pricing main item TAP The below item category Pricing is “B” (Free
Text item TATX Goods Pricing / 100% Discount)
Mat det item pricing main item TAPA Free Goods TANN
Mat det Header pricing sub item TAPS
STO NLN
STO Returns NLRN
Item proposal PVN

The below item categories Pricing is “X” (Relevant for Pricing)

Inquiry AFN
Quotation AGN
Order/Rush Order TAN
Cash Sales BVN
Returns REN
Credit Memo/Invoice Correction G2N
Debit Memo L2N
Consignment Issue KEN
Consignment Returns KRN
Quantity Contract KMN
Value Contract WKN
Scheduling Agreement LPN
Third Party TAS
Third Party Returns TASG
IPO TAB
Make to Order TAK
Configurable Material TAD
Value Item TAW
Delivery W/O Order reference DLN
BOM Header pricing Main item TAQ
Mat. Det Header pricing Main item TAX
Intercompany STO NLC
Intercompany STO Returns NCRN
264 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Statistical Value:

Any Item category if we maintain statistical value “X”, then the line-item value will become inactive.

And it does not have any effect on total value

E.g.,

BOM HEADER PRICING

Item Category
Computer TAQ Pricing “X” 15000
CPU TAE Pricing “ “ 0
Monitor TAE Pricing “ “ 0
Keyboard TAE Pricing “ “ 0
Mouse TAE Pricing “ “ 0

BOM HEADER PRICING

Item Category
Computer TAQ Pricing “X” 15000
CPU TAE Pricing “X” 8000
Monitor TAE Pricing “X” 6000
Keyboard TAE Pricing “X” 500
Mouse TAE Pricing “X” 500
Total 30000

BOM HEADER PRICING

Item Category
Computer TAQ Pricing “X” 15000
CPU TAE Pricing “X” St. Value “X” 8000
Monitor TAE Pricing “X” St. Value “X” 6000
Keyboard TAE Pricing “X” St. Value “X” 500
Mouse TAE Pricing “X” St. Value “X” 500
Total 15000

265 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Automatic batch determination:

If we check this, then the batch number will be determined automatically into Sales document.
Generally, we don’t determine batch number in Sales document. We will determine batch number in
Delivery document.

Rounding permitted:

If we check this, then system will perform rounding on quantity decimal.

Order quantity = 1:

If we check this, then each line-item quantity will be restricted to 1.

Create PO Automatic:

If we check this then while creating Sales order in third party process and IPO process system
automatically generates PO.

We can check this only for the following item categories

Third Party TAS

IPO TAB

266 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

04032022

Structure Scope:

This field controls whether to explode BOM or not. And this also controls whether to explode single
level Bom or multilevel BOM.

“ “ : Do not explore BOM

“A” : Explode single level BOM
“B” : Explode multilevel BOM

We maintain Structure scope only for

BOM Header pricing main item TAQ

BOM Item pricing main item TAP

The below item categories we maintain Structure scope.

Examples for Multi-level BOM

Computer
Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
CPU
Hard disk
RAM
Processor
Configure multi-level BOM
Create Material for Hard Disk, RAM and Processor with MM01 (Copy CPU)
Create BOM for CPU
T-Code: CS01
Mention
Material : HCPU
Plant : H200
BOM Usage :5
Enter
Mention

Save

267 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Value Contract Material:

This field will be maintained only for WKN Item category.

Mention the Material in the field

Create Value Contract

If we maintain Material here, then system automatically determines it while creating Value contract
general document.

Contract Release Control:

We maintain this field only for Value contract.

Value Contract
50 Lakhs

Release Order Release Order Release Order

20 Lakhs 25Lakhs 10 Lakhs

This field controls how system should responds if the release order value exceeds contract value.
i.e., whether give warning message/Error message/No message.

268 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

08032022

AFN AGN
Completion Rule “A” “B”

TAN BVN
Credit Active “X” “ “
Billing Relevance “A” “B”

TAN REN
Returns “ “ “X”
Billing Relevance “A” “B”
Credit Active “X” “ “

G2N L2N
Returns “X” “ “
Credit Active “ “ “X”

REN G2N
Billing Relevance “B” “C”

TAN KEN
Special Stock “ “ “W”

REN KRN
Special Stock “ “ “W”

TAN TAS
Billing Relevance “A” “F”

TAS TASG
Returns “ “ “X”
Credit Active “X” “ ”

TAN TAB
Special Stock “ “ “E”

TAN TAK
Special Stock “ “ “E”

TAN TAQ
Structure Scope “ “ “A”

TAQ TAE
Pricing “X” “ “
Credit Active “X” “ “
Billing Relevance “A” “ “
Structure Scope “A” “ “
269 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SCENARIOS IN ITEM CATEGORY CONTROLS

1. Clients’ requirement they don’t want to change Payment terms and Incur terms at item
level, where is the control
Uncheck Business item

2. Clients’ requirement is they want to refer quotation only once

Quotation AGN → Change the completion rule from B to A

3. Clients’ requirement is if customer purchased some Slow-moving materials, then system

should not update the value into credit management. Where is the control?
Copy TAN to ZTAN → Uncheck Credit active in ZTAN → Determine ZTAN for those slow-
moving materials

4. Clients’ requirement is for some materials system should not display the cost in sales order
Copy TAN to YTAN → Uncheck determine cost in YTAN → Determine this YTAN for those
materials for which we don’t want to display the cost

5. Clients’ requirement is In BOM Header pricing they want price for components also. Where
is the control?
Go to TAE → Maintain Pricing “X”, Statistical value “X”

6. Clients’ requirement is they don’t want Zero quantity line item in invoice in case of batch
management
Go to Item category TAN → Maintain billing relevance as “M”

7. Clients’ requirement is they want to explode Multi level BOM. Where is the control?
Go to Item category TAQ/TAB → Maintain structure scope as “B”

270 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN ITEM CATEGORY CONTROLS

1. What is item type field in item category controls?

This field controls the functioning of the lime item. i.e., whether it is standard item or
Value item or Text item or Packing item.

Standard Item - Blank

Value Item - A
Text Item - B
Packing Item - C

2. What happens if I check uncheck business item?

System will not allow to change the business data item levels.

3. Which item categories schedule lines allowed is unchecked?

Credit Memo, Debit Memo, Qty Contract, Value Contract, Text item

4. Which item category we check returns?

REN, G2N, KRN, TASG, NLRN, NCRN

5. What happens if I check returns for item category TAN?

Net value will be negative and accounting entry will be reverse.

6. What happens if I uncheck determine cost?

System will not determine the cost condition type (VPRS) into Sales document.

7. What happens if I uncheck Credit active?

Line-item value will not be updated into credit management.

8. What is the purpose of completion rule?

This field controls when the status of the line items should be completed.

9. What is the purpose of special stock indicator?

This field controls while doing delivery which stock system should consider.

10. What is the purpose of special stock “W” in KEN item category?
This field controls that when we do delivery in consignment system will only consider
consignment stock.

11. What is the purpose of Billing relevance “M” ?

Billing Relevance “M” will help to restrict zero quantity line items in invoice in case of
Batch management.

12. What is the purpose of Billing relevance “F” in TAS item category?
Billing Relevance “F” controls that without MIRO system will not allow to create invoice
to customer.

271 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

13. What is the purpose of Billing relevance “G” in TAS item category?
Billing Relevance “G” controls that without MIGO system will not allow to create invoice
to customer in Third party with Shipping notification.

14. What is the purpose of Pricing?

This field controls that whether the items are relevant for pricing or not, and it also
controls whether the item is relevant for Normal Pricing or Free-Goods Pricing.

15. What happens if I maintain statistical value?

If we maintain Statistical value “X”, then the lime item value will be inactive and it does
not have any effect on total value.

16. What is the purpose of Structure scope?

This field controls whether explode BOM or not and also control whether to explode
single level BOM or Multi level BOM.

17. What is the purpose of Contract release control?

This field controls how system should respond if the release order value exceeds contract
value. i.e., whether give warning message/Error message/No message.

272 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

08032022
ITEM CATEGORY DETERMINATION

The T-Code for Item category determination is VOV4.

PATH:

SPRO → SALES & DISTRIBUTION → SALES → SALES DOCUMENTS → SALES DOCUMENT ITEM →
ASSIGN ITEM CATEGORIES

Item categories determines based on

- Sales document types

- Item category group
- Item usage and
- Higher level Item category

We have Item category group field in Material Master → Sales Org. 2 view

The standard Item category group is NORM

Create New Item Category in VOV7

Click on Position
Go to TAN
Copy TAN and Crete your own (Ex: HTAN)
Save & Continue

(If we want our own item category in our Sales Order)

Determine Item Category in VOV4 determine HTAN to HOR
Go to VOV4
Click on Position
Enter
Change the default Item category TAN to HTAN

273 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

09032022

ITEM CATEGORY DETERMINATION SCENARIOS

SCENARIO: 1 Item category determination based on Sales Document type

Sales Doc Type IN QT OR RO CS RE CR

Item Cat Grp NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category AFN AGN TAN TAN BVN REN G2N

Sales Doc Type RK DR FD SDF CF CI CONR

Item Cat Grp NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category G2N L2N KLN KLN KBN KEN KRN

Sales Doc Type CP QC WK1 WK2 DS PV

Item Cat Grp NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category KAN KMN WKN WKN LPN PVN

SCENARIO: 2 Item category determination based on Item category group

The field Item category group is in Material Master → Sales Org 2 View

Some of the Item Category groups are

Standard NORM
Third Party BANS
IPO BANC
Make to Order 0001
Configurable Material 0002
BOM Header Pricing Main Item ERLA
BOM Item Pricing Main Item LUMF

Defining Item Category Groups

SPRO → SALES & DISTRIBUTION → SALES → SALES DOCUMENTS → SALES DOCUMENT ITEM →
DEFINE ITEM CATEGORY GROUPS

Sales Doc Type OR OR OR OR OR OR OR

Item Cat Grp NORM BANS BANC 0001 0002 ERLA LUMF
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category TAN TAS TAB TAK TAC TAQ TAP

274 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

10032022

Clients’ requirement is if customer purchased X, Y, Z material then system should not update the
value into credit management.
Solution:
Step 1 : Copy TAN to HTAN and uncheck credit active
Step 2 : Create new Item category group XORM
Step 3 : Create the Materials and maintain Item category as XORM
Step 4 : Go to Item category determination VOV4
New Entries
Sales Doc Type : HOR
Item Cat Group : XORM

XTAN : XTAN

Step 5 : Testing Create Sales Order for other materials and this Material
Sales Order
VAXI15300100BOT HTAN
X XTAN

If Customer purchased A, B, C materials then system should not display the cost in Sales order.
Solution:
Step 1 : Copy TAN to ZTAN and uncheck Determine Cost
Step 2 : Create new item category group ZORM
Step 3 : Create Materials and maintain item category as ZORM
Step 4 : Go to Item category determination VOV4
New Entries
Sales Doc Type : HOR
Item Cat Group : ZORM

XTAN : ZTAN

Step 5 : Testing Create Sales Order for other materials and this Material
Sales Order
VAXI15300100BOT HTAN
A ZTAN

275 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SCENARIO: 3 Item category determination based on Higher level Item category

System considers higher level item category whenever system is determining item category for sub
item.
The below scenarios system considers higher item categories

1. Free Goods
2. Bill of Material (BOM)
3. Material determination
4. Cross selling

Manual Free Goods

X TAN Sales Doc Type OR

Y (Free) TANN Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category TAN

Sales Doc Type OR

Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat TAN
Default Item Category TANN
BOM Header Pricing

Computer TAQ Sales Doc Type OR

CPU TAE Item Cat Grp ERLA
Monitor TAE Item Usage
Keyboard TAE Higher Level Item Cat
Mouse TAE Default Item Category TAQ
Sales Doc Type OR
Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat TAQ
Default Item Category TAE
BOM Item Pricing

Computer TAP Sales Doc Type OR

CPU TAN Item Cat Grp LUMF
Monitor TAN Item Usage
Keyboard TAN Higher Level Item Cat
Mouse TAN Default Item Category TAP
Sales Doc Type OR
Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat TAP
Default Item Category TAN

276 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Multi-level BOM Header pricing

Computer TAQ Sales Doc Type OR

Mouse TAE Item Cat Grp ERLA
Monitor TAE Item Usage
Keyboard TAE Higher Level Item Cat
CPU TAE Default Item Category TAQ
Hard disk TAE Sales Doc Type OR
RAM TAE Item Cat Grp NORM
Processor TAE Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat TAQ
Default Item Category TAE
Sales Doc Type OR
Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat TAE
Default Item Category TAE

11032022

Multi-level BOM Item pricing

Computer TAP Sales Doc Type OR

Mouse JTAN Item Cat Grp LUMF
Monitor JTAN Item Usage
Keyboard JTAN Higher Level Item Cat
CPU JTAN Default Item Category TAP
Hard disk TAE Sales Doc Type OR
RAM TAE Item Cat Grp NORM
Processor TAE Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat TAP
Default Item Category JTAN
Sales Doc Type OR
Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat JTAN
Default Item Category TAE

277 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SCENARIO: 4 Item category determination based on Item Usage

System considers Item usage whenever sub item is automatically determining into sales document
other than BOM.
System considers Item usage in below scenarios.

1. Automatic Free goods

2. Material Determination
3. Cross Selling

Item Usage
Automatic Free Goods FREE

Mat Det Header Pricing Main Item PSHP

Mat Det Header Pricing Sub Item PSEL

Mat Det Item Pricing Main Item PSA1

Mat Det Item Pricing Sub Item PSA2

Cross Selling CSEL

Automatic Free Goods

X TAN Sales Doc Type OR

Y (FREE) TANN Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category TAN

Sales Doc Type OR

Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage FREE
Higher Level Item Cat TAN
Default Item Category TANN

Material determination Header Pricing

X TAX Sales Doc Type OR

Y (Substituted Material) TAPS Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage PSHP
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category TAX

Sales Doc Type OR

Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage PSEL
Higher Level Item Cat TAX
Default Item Category TAPS

278 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Material determination Item Pricing

X TAPA Sales Doc Type OR

Y (Substituted Material) TAN Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage PSA1
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category TAPA

Sales Doc Type OR

Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage PSA2
Higher Level Item Cat TAPA
Default Item Category TAN

Cross Selling

X TAN Sales Doc Type OR

Y (Additional Product) TAN Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage
Higher Level Item Cat
Default Item Category TAN

Sales Doc Type OR

Item Cat Grp NORM
Item Usage CSEL
Higher Level Item Cat TAN
Default Item Category TAN

Clients’ requirement is some customers if they purchase some materials then system should not
update the value into credit management.

Step 1: Copy TAN to XTAN uncheck credit active in XTAN

Step 2: Create New Item Usage
Step 3: Assign Item Usage in CMIR
Step 4: Create new Item category Group with the New Item Usage (OR, NORM, Item Usage, XTAN)

279 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

14032022

SCHEDULE LINE CATEGORY

Schedule line category controls Schedule Data

Item Data

Header Data

Schedule Line Data Some part of Configuration Data

Some part of Control Data
Table: VBEP Schedule Line Category

The source of Schedule line data is

- Some part of configuration Data

- Some Part of Control Data

Schedule Line data will be controlled by Schedule Line category

The Table for Schedule line data is VBEP

Doc Type Item Category Sch. Category

INQUIRY IN AFN AN/AT
QUOTATION QT AGN BN/BT
ORDER OR TAN CP
RUSH ORDER RO TAN CP
CASH SALES CS BVN CP
FREE OF CHARGE FD KLN CP
SUB DEL FREE OF CHARGE SDF KLN CP
SCHEDULING AGREEMENT DS LPN CP
RETURNS RE REN DN
CONSIGN. FILLUP CF KBN E1
CONSIGN. ISSUE CI KEN C1
CONSIGN. RETURNS CONR KRN D0
CONSIGN. PICKUP CP KAN F1

Doc Type Item Category Sch. Category

CREDIT MEMO REQUEST CR G2N “ “
INVOICE CORR. REQUEST RK G2N “ “
DEBIT MEMO REQUEST DR L2N “ “
QUANTITY CONTRACT QC KMN “ “
VAL CONTRACT GEN WK1 WKN “ “
VAL CONTRACT MAT SPE WK2 WKN “ “
ITEM PROPOSAL PV PVN “ “

280 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Item Category Sch. Category

FREE GOODS TANN CP
THIRD PARTY TAS CS
THIRD PARTY RETURNS TASG CS
IPO TAB CB
MAKE TO ORDER TAK CP
CINFIGURABLE MATERIAL TAC CP
DELIVERY W/O ORD REF DLN CN
STO NLN NN
STO RETURNS NLRN NR
INTERCOMPANY STO NLC NC
INTERCOMPANY STO RETURNS NCRN NS
BOM HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM TAQ CP
BOM HEADERR PRICING SUB ITEM TAE CT
BOM ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM TAP CT
BOM ITEM PRICING SUB ITEM TAN CP

MATERIAL DET. HEADER PRICING MAIN ITEM TAX CX

MATERIAL DET. HEADER PRICING SUB ITEM TAPS PP

MATERIAL DET. ITEM PRICING MAIN ITEM TAPA CD

MATERIAL DET. ITEM PRICING SUB ITEM TAN CP

Item Category Sch. Category

TEXT ITEM TATX “ “
VALUE ITEM TAW “ “
SERVICE ITEM TAD “ “

In standard we have 19 Schedule line categories

SCHEDULE LINE CATEGORY CONTROLS

T-CODE: VOV6
PATH:
SPRO → SALES & DISTRIBUTION → SALES → SALES DOCUMENTS → SCHEDULE LINES → DEFINE
SCHEDULE LINE CATEGORIES

If we want to create our own Schedule Line category Copy the standard mention our own.

Copy CP and Mention HP

Click on Yes →Save

To determine our own Schedule Line Category

Go to the T-CODE: VOV5
Click on Position (HTAN & PD) combination
Change Schedule Line category as HP
Save it

281 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Delivery Block:

If we maintain Delivery Block in schedule line category, then it will block only that particular
Schedule Line for Delivery.

Item Relevant for Delivery:

This field controls whether the standard item is Relevant for Delivery or not.
If the Standard item is relevant for Delivery, then we have to check this field.
If we uncheck this system identifies that the item is not relevant for delivery.

The below Schedule Line categories Item Relevant for Delivery is checked

Standard CP
Returns DN
Consignment Fill-up E1
Consignment Issue C1
Consignment Returns D0
Consignment Pickup F1
IPO CB
STO NN
STO Returns NR
Intercompany STO NC
Intercompany STO Ret NS
BOM CT
BOM Item Pricing Main Item CT
Delivery w/o order reference CN
Material det Header Pricing Main item CX

282 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

15032022

Movement Type:

Every physical type movement of goods requires movement type information. That means if we are
moving the goods from one place to another place then that should have movement type of
information.

Example:

- Moving the Goods from one plant to another plant

- Moving the goods from one storage location to another storage location
- Moving the goods from plant to customer.
- Moving the goods from customer to plant (returns).

Movement type controls two things

1. Stock updation
2. Inventory accounting document.

Schedule Line Category

Standard CP
Movement type 601

The effect of 601 movement type is

1. Stock will be reduced from unrestricted stock

2. Inventory accounting document generates

Cost of Goods sold A/C Dr

To Inventory A/C Cr

To see the inventory accounting document

Go to Change mode of Delivery (VL02N)
Click on Document flow
Select Goods issue delivery
Click on Display document
Click on Accounting Document
Check the accounting entry

Systems determines movement type when we do PGI

283 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Schedule Line Category

Reverse PGI Movement type 602

- The effect of 602 movement type is stock will be added to unrestricted stock
- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods sold A/C Cr

The T-Code for Reverse PGI is VL09

Mention
Shipping Point
Delivery no.
Execute

Select the Delivery

Click on Reverse (F5)
Click on continue
Click on continue

Check the Stock

Go to VL02N to Check the Inventory Accounting document

Order Doc Type

HOR
Item Cat
HTAN
Sch CAT
HP
Delivery Mov. Type 602

Q. How system determines Movement type for Reverse PGI

Ans. T-Code: OMJJ
Select Movement type
Click on continue
Mention
From: 602
Continue
Double click on Allowed Transactions

284 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Schedule Line Category

Returns DN
Movement type 651
The effect of 651 movement type is

- Stock will be added to return stock

- Inventory accounting document will not generate (Return stock is a temporary stock)

Schedule Line Category

Returns DN
Movement type 653

The effect of 653 movement type is

- Stock will be added to unrestricted stock

- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods sold A/C Cr

Schedule Line Category

Returns DN
Movement type 655

The effect of 655 movement type is

- Stock will be added to Quality inspection stock

- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods sold A/C Cr

Schedule Line Category

Returns DN
Movement type 657

The effect of 657 movement type is

- Stock will be added to Blocked stock

- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods sold A/C Cr

285 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

16032022
Schedule Line Category
Consign. Fill up E1
Movement type 631

The effect of 631 movement type is

- Stock will be reduced from unrestricted stock and Stock will be added to Consignment stock.
- Inventory accounting document will not generate because we are not transferring the
ownership to customers.

Schedule Line Category

Consign. Issue C1
Movement type 633

The effect of 633 movement type is

- Stock will be reduced from Consignment stock.

- Inventory accounting document generates because we transfer the ownership to Customers
and the accounting entry is

Cost of Goods Sold A/C Dr

To Inventory A/C Cr

Schedule Line Category

Consign. Returns D0
Movement type 634

The effect of 634 movement type is

- Stock will be added to Consignment stock.

- Inventory accounting document generates because we transfer the ownership to Customers
and the accounting entry is

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods Sold A/C Cr

Schedule Line Category

Consign. Pick-up F1
Movement type 632

The effect of 632 movement type is

- Stock will be reduced from Consignment Stock and stock will be added to unrestricted stock.
- Inventory accounting document will not generate.

286 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Schedule Line Category

STO NN
Movement type 2 Step 641
Movement type 1 Step 647

Movement type 2 Step - 641

Supplying Plant H100 Mumbai

100
X Stock
-60
40
Step 1: Step 2:
PD (60 Qty) Delivery W.R.T. PO
Receiving Plant H200 Vapi
Stock in Transit 60 Qty

The effect of 641 movement type is

- Stock will be reduced from Supplying plant and stock will be displayed as stock in transit in
receiving plant.
- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Receiving Plant Dr
To Supplying Plant Cr

Movement type 1 Step – 647

Supplying Plant H100 Mumbai

100
X Stock
-60
40
Step 1: Step 2:
PD (60 Qty) Delivery W.R.T. PO
Receiving Plant H200 Vapi
Stock 60 Qty

The effect of 647 movement type is

- Stock will be reduced from Supplying plant and stock will be added to receiving plant.
- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

Receiving Plant Dr
To Supplying Plant Cr

287 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Schedule Line Category

STO Returns NR
Movement type 2 Step 671
Movement type 1 Step 677

Schedule Line Category

Intercompany STO NC
Movement type 2 Step 643
Movement type 1 Step 645

Schedule Line Category

Intercompany STO Returns NS
Movement type 2 Step 673
Movement type 1 Step 675

MM & PP Movement Types

Stock Posting Movement type 561

The Effect 561 movement type is

- Stock will be added to Unrestricted stock

- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is

If Valuation class is 7920

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods manufactured A/C Cr

If Valuation class is 3100 (Trading)

Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods procured A/C Cr

MIGO Movement type 101

We do MIGO for Trading Goods i.e., Valuation Class is 3100

The effect of 101 movement type is

- Stock will be added to Unrestricted stock

- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is
Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods procured A/C Cr

288 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Manufacture Movement type 101

We manufacture Finished Goods. i.e., Valuation Class is 7920

The effect of 101 movement type is

- Stock will be added to Unrestricted stock

- Inventory accounting document generates and the accounting entry is
Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods manufactured A/C Cr

BOM Header Sub CT

Movement type “ “  Item Relevant for Delivery

The result is System will determine the components in Delivery but stock will not be reduced.

Work: Create Order for BOM items and check the stock of the items and Invoice. (Only Main item
stock will be reduced and Invoice will be generated for Main item only)

289 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

17032022

Item Cat [Link] Cat

BOM HEADER PRICING
TAQ CP
ORDER Pricing “X” Mov Type 601 Item Rel for Delivery
Computer 15000 Bill Rel “A”
CPU 0
Monitor 0 TAE CT
Keyboard 0 Pricing “ “ Mov Type “ “ Item Rel for Delivery
Mouse 0 Bill Rel “ “

DELIVERY
Computer (Main Item Stock will be reduced)
CPU
Monitor
Keyboard
Mouse

INVOICE
Computer

Practice Scenario 1:

Clients’ requirement is they want components in Invoice, where is the control.

Go to item category TAE and maintain Billing relevance “A”

Practice Scenario 2:

Clients’ requirement is they don’t want components in Delivery, where is the control.
Schedule line category “CT” and uncheck Item relevant for Delivery.

Practice Scenario 3:

Clients’ requirement is they don’t want to display components in Sales order, where is the control.
Go to Sales document type controls (HOR), maintain display range as UHAU.

Practice Scenario 4:

Clients’ requirement is they want price for components also, where is the control.
Go to TAE Item category maintain pricing “X” and also statistical value “X”

Practice Scenario 5:

Clients’ requirement is they want to reduce the stock of components only, where is the control.
Go to CP remove movement type and go to CT mention CT movement type 601.

290 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Order Type:

We maintain Order type only for 3rd party and IPO. i.e., CS and CB.

For Third party & IPO Schedule Line category, we maintain order type as NB.

Order type NB controls that when we create sales order in third party process and IPO process,
system automatically generates PR (Purchase requisition)

Third Party Process & IPO Process

ORDER

PR (Purchase Requisition)

Customer

291 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Item Category:

Schedule Line Cat CS (Third Party)

Item Category 5

Item Category 5 in CS Schedule line category (Third Party) controls that when we do MIGO in third
party with Shipping notification System will treat it as dummy MIGO and stocks will not be updated.

Third Party with Shipping Notification

Movement in Goods Out

ORDER
(Shipping Notification / Delivery Challan)
MIGO

PR (Purchase Requisition)

PO (Purchase Order)

Vendor

Customer

292 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Schedule Line Cat CB (IPO)

Item Category 0

The Item Category “0” in CB Schedule line category controls that, when we MIGO in IPO process;
system will treat it as actual MIGO and stocks will be updated.

IPO Process

Movement in Goods Out

ORDER
(Goods Receipt)
MIGO

PR (Purchase Requisition)

PO (Purchase Order)

Vendor

Customer

293 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Account Assignment Category:

Schedule Line Cat CS (Third Party)

Acc. Assgt. Category 1

Account assignment category “1” will help to pass the customer information from
ORDER to PR and PR to PO

Third Party Process

ORDER Movement in Goods Out

Customer 100659 (Shipping Notification / Delivery Challan)

MIGO

PR (Purchase Requisition)

PO (Purchase Order)

Vendor

Customer

294 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

21032022

Schedule Line Cat CB (IPO)

Acc. Assgt. Category “E”

The Account assignment category “E” in CB Schedule line category controls that, when we do
delivery in IPO process system will not generate inventory accounting document. Because the cost of
goods will be directly assigned to that particular sales order number.

Purchase requisition delivery Schedule:

We check this only for CB Schedule line category (IPO)

If we check Purchase requisition delivery schedule, then system will copy the Schedule line data as it
is
Order to PR and PR to PO in IPO process.

Requirement Assembly:

This field is one of pre-requisite to transfer the sales order requirements to MRP.
If we check this, then only the sales order requirements will be transferred to MRP.

295 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

If we uncheck this, then the sales order requirements will not be transferred to MRP (We can see the
result in MD04)

Availability:

This field is one of the pre-requisites to perform availability check in Sales order.
If we check this, then only system will perform availability check in sales order.
If we uncheck this, then system will not perform available check in Sales order.

Product Allocation:

If we want to perform availability check on reserved stock, then check Product allocation.

CP CN
Requirement/Assembly  “ “
Availability  “ “

296 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Schedule Line Category Determination

T-CODE: VOV5

PATH:
SPRO → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Sales Documents → Scheduled Lines → Assign Schedule
Line Categories

Schedule Line category determines based on Item category and MRP type.

Item Category TAN TAN

MRP Type PD ND
CP CN

If Item category and MRP type combination is not maintained in Schedule Line determination, then
what system will do?
System will give second preference to only Item category.

What is the purpose of manual schedule Line categories in Schedule Line category determination?
This will help to change the Schedule Line category manually while creating Sales document.

Questions in Schedule Category

1. What is the purpose of Order type NB?

Order type NB controls that when we create sales order in third party process and IPO
process, system automatically generates PR (Purchase requisition)

2. Which Schedule Line Categories we maintain Order type NB?

We maintain Order type NB for CS & CB Schedule Line Categories.

3. What is the purpose of Item Category “5” in CS Schedule Line Category?

When we do MIGO in Third party with Shipping notification, then system will treat it as
dummy MIGO and stock will not be updated.

4. What is the purpose of Item Category “0” in CB Schedule Line Category?

When we do MIGO in IPO process, then system will treat it as actual MIGO and stock will get
updated.

5. What is the purpose of Account assignment category “1” in CS Schedule Line Category?
It will help to pass the customer information from Order to PO and PR to PO.

6. What is the purpose of Account assignment category “E” in CB Schedule Line Category?
System will not generate Inventory accounting document. Because the cost of goods will be
directly assigned to that particular sales order.

7. What happens if I check Purchase requisition delivery schedule?

System will copy the Schedule line data as it is form ORDER to PR and PR to PO.

297 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

8. What happens if I uncheck availability in Schedule line Category?

System will not perform availability check in Sales Order.

9. What is the purpose of Product allocation check box in Schedule Line Category?
If we want to perform Availability check om Reserved stock, then we have to check Product
allocation.

10. What happens if I uncheck Item Relevant Delivery in Schedule Line Category?
If we uncheck Item Relevant Delivery, then system identifies that the item is not relevant for
delivery and that item will not be determined in Delivery.

11. What is the standard movement type and what is its effect?
The standard Movement type “601” and the effect is Stock will be reduced from Unrestricted
Stock and the accounting entry is
Cost of Goods Sold A/C Dr
To Inventory A/C Cr

12. What is the Movement type for Reverse PGI, what is its effect?
Stock will be added to Unrestricted stock and the accounting entry generates.
Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods Sold A/C Cr

13. How system determines Movement type for Reverse PGI?

T-Code: OMJJ

14. What is the movement type for Returns, what is the effect?
Movement type: 651
Stock will be added to Return stock and Inventory document will not generate because
Return stock is temporary.

15. What is the effect of 653 Movement type in returns?

Stock will be added to Unrestricted stock and the accounting entry is
Inventory A/C Dr
To Cost of Goods Sold A/C Cr

16. How Schedule Line category determines?

Based on Item Category and MRP type.

17. If Item category and MRP type combination is not maintained in Schedule Line Category
determination, then what system will do?
System will give second preference to only Item Category.

18. What is the purpose of Manual Schedule Line categories in Schedule Line Category
determination?
This will help to change the Schedule Line category manually while creating Sales document.

298 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

22032022

DELIVERY TYPES

Structure of Delivery Document

Structure of Delivery document is divided into 2 parts

1. Header Data
2. Item Data

Table Source
Ship to Party
Header Data
Sales Order
LIKP
Some part of Configuration Data
Delivery Types
Some part of Control data
Material Master
Item Data
Sales Order
LIPS
Some part of Configuration Data
Delivery Item Category
Some part of Control Data

Header Data:

Header data is the data which is applicable to all the line items in Delivery documents.
The source of Header data is

- Ship to Party
- Sales Order
- Some Part of Configuration Data
- Some part of Control Data

The table for Header Data is LIKP.

Header Data will be controlled by Delivery types.

Item Data:

Item Data is the data which is applicable to particular line item in delivery document.

The source of item data is

- Material Master
- Sales order
- Some part of Configuration Data
- Some part of Control Data

The table for Item data if LIPS.

Item data will be controlled by Delivery item category.

299 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Delivery Type
Standard LF
Returns LR
Cash Sale BV
Delivery W/O Order Ref LO
STO NL
STO Returns NLR
Intercompany STO NLCC
Intercompany STO Returns NCR

The T-CODE to define Delivery types is 0VLK / OVLK

PATH:

SPRO → Logistics Execution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define Delivery Types

Copy Standard Delivery type (LF) and create our own (e.g., HLF)

When we create your own delivery type then

Go to Sales document type controls (VOV8)

Go to our Sales document type (HOR)

Mention the Delivery type (HLF)

Save it.

300 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Delivery Type Controls

Document Category:

This field controls the functioning of the Delivery document. i.e., Whether it is Outbound Delivery or
Return Delivery.

“J” means Outbound Delivery

“T” means Return Delivery

Where is the Control that for Return Delivery System will display “Post Goods Receipt”?
Document Category “T”

Number Range Internal Assignment & Number Range External Assignment:

The T-Code to define Number Ranges for Delivery documents VN01

Item No Increment:

This field controls how the line-item number should be incremented in Delivery document.

Order required:

This field controls whether any preceding document is required or not to create a Delivery
document.

Delivery Types Order Required

LF, LR, BV “X” Sales order required
LO “ “ No preceding document required
NL, NLR, NLCC, NCR “B” Purchase order required

301 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Default Order type:

Normal Process: Doc. Type

Order: OR
Item Category
TAN
Schedule Line Cat
CP
Movement type: 601

Delivery
PGI

Delivery Process: Doc. Type

(W/O Ord Ref) Order: OR
Item Category
DLN
Schedule Line Cat
CN
Movement type: 601

Delivery
PGI

System considers default order type DL, if they are creating delivery W/O order reference.
System considers default order type DL to determine Movement type while creating delivery W/O
order reference.

When system considers default order type “DL”?

If we are creating Delivery W/O order reference.

Why system considers default order type “DL”?

To determine Movement type while creating delivery W/O order reference.

How system determines Movement type when we create Delivery W/O order reference?
System takes default order type DL from Delivery types and determine Item Category “DLN”
and determine Schedule Line category “CN” and Movement type “601”

302 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Item Requirement:

This field controls whether to add new line item in Delivery document or not.
If we want to add new line item in Delivery document, then maintain item requirement as “202”.
If we don’t want to add new line item in Delivery document, then maintain item requirement as
“201”.

23032022

Storage Location Rule:

Storage Location Rule will help to determine Storage location automatically while creating Delivery
document.

We have 3 storage location rules.

1. MALA : MALA rule specifies that Storage location should be determined based on
- Shipping Point
- Plant
- Storage Conditions

T-Code for Storage Location Determination: OVL3

2. RETA : RETA rule specifies that Storage location should be determined based on
- Plant
- Situation
- Storage Conditions

3. MARE : MARE rule specifies that first check MALA rule, if MALA rule is not maintained then
check RETA rule.

303 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

DELIVERY ITEM CATEGORIES

T-CODE: 0VLP

PATH:

SPRO → Logistics Execution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define Item Categories for Deliveries

Click on Position
Go to our Item Category (HTAN)
Click on Details

Delivery Item Category Controls

Item Category Statistics group:

This field controls whether to update Delivery data into LIS (Logistics Information System) reports or
not. LIS is a management reporting tool.

Check Quantity 0:

This field controls how system should respond if the quantity in the delivery document is “0”.
i.e., whether to give Warning message/Error message/No message.

- Blank : No Message
- A : Warning Message
- B : Error Message

Check minimum quantity:

This field controls how system should respond if the Delivery quantity is less than minimum delivery
quantity. i.e., whether to give Warning message/Error message/No message.

304 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

We maintain minimum delivery quantity in Material Master → Sales Org.1 view.

- Blank : No Message
- A : Warning Message
- B : Error Message

Check Over Delivery:

This field controls how system should respond if the delivery quantity is more than order quantity.
i.e., whether to give Warning message/Error message/No message.

- Blank : No Message
- A : Warning Message
- B : Error Message

This field will have relationship with Over delivery tolerance in Customer master & CMIR.

If we maintain Over delivery tolerance then system will allow to increase the quantities in delivery
document up to that percentage. If the Percentage exceeds then system will give Warning
message/Error message.

If we check Unlimited tolerance then Check over delivery concept will not work.

Availability Check Off:

This field controls whether to perform Availability check in Delivery document or not.

IF we want to perform Availability check in Delivery document, then maintain Availability Check Off
as Blank. If we don’t want to perform availability check in Delivery document, then maintain
Availability Check Off as “X”.

In Standard we have to perform Availability Check in Delivery document.

305 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Relevant for Picking:

This field controls whether the item is relevant for picking or not.
If the Item is relevant for picking, then check this field.
If we uncheck relevant for Picking, then pick quantity field in Delivery document will be disabled.
The below Item categories Relevant for Picking is unchecked.

REN Returns
KRN Consignment Returns
KEN Consignment Issue
KAN Consignment Pick-up

24032022

Determine Storage Location:

If we check this then system will determine Storage location automatically into Delivery document.

(For this we have to do Picking point determination in OVL3 and in Material Master Plant
Loc/Storage Data tab → Shipping Condition maintain as “01”)

Automatic Batch determination:

If we check this then the batch number would be determined into automatically into Delivery
document.

306 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Packing Control:

This field controls whether the Material must be packed / Can be packed / Cannot be packed.

Blank - Can be packed

A - Must be packed
B - Cannot be packed

307 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Delivery Item Category determination

In Standard process when we create Delivery with the reference to Sales order, then System will
copy the Item Category from Sales order to Delivery.

Order : HOR

Item Cat: HTAN

Delivery

Item Cat: HTAN

The below scenarios System will determine Item category in Deliveries.

1. Delivery W/O Order Reference

2. Adding New Line Item in Delivery
3. STO

The T-Code for Delivery Item Category Determination is 0184

Path:
SPRO → Logistics Execution → Shipping → Deliveries → Define Item Category Determination in
Delivery

The Delivery Item Category determines based on

- Delivery Type
- Item Category Group
- Item Usage
- Higher Level Item Category

308 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Delivery W/O Order Reference:

Delivery Type LO
Item Cat Group NORM
Item Usage “ “
Higher Level Item Cat “ “
Default Item Cat DLN

Adding New Line Item in Delivery:

Delivery Type LF
Item Cat Group NORM
Item Usage “ “
Higher Level Item Cat “ “
Default Item Cat DLN

STO:

Delivery Type NL
Item Cat Group NORM
Item Usage “V “
Higher Level Item Cat “ “
Default Item Cat NLN

STO Returns:

Delivery Type NLR

Item Cat Group NORM
Item Usage “V”
Higher Level Item Cat “ “
Default Item Cat NLRN

Inter Company STO:

Delivery Type NLCC

Item Cat Group NORM
Item Usage “V “
Higher Level Item Cat “ “
Default Item Cat NLC

Inter Company STO Returns:

Delivery Type NCR

Item Cat Group NORM
Item Usage “V “
Higher Level Item Cat “ “
Default Item Cat NCRN

309 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Billing types
T-CODE: VOFA

Path:

SPRO → IMG → Sales & Distribution → Billing → Billing Documents → Define Billing Types

Double Click on Define Billing Types

Standard F2
Cash Sale BV
Returns RE
Credit Memo G2
Debit Memo L2
Proforma Invoice Order Related F5
Proforma Invoice Delivery Related F8
Invoice Cancellation S1
Return Invoice & Credit Memo Cancellation S2
Intercompany Invoice IV
Intercompany Credit Memo IG

Proforma Invoice is a Dummy invoice which will not generate accounting document.

What is the difference between Billing and Invoice?

Billing is the document which we create in SAP and Invoice is the output of the Billing document
which we send it to customer.

310 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Structure of Billing Document

Table Source
HEADER DATA Sales Order
VBRK Delivery
Billing Types Payer
Some part of Config Data
Some part of Control Data
ITEM DATA Sales Order
VBRP Delivery
Material Master
Some part of Config Data
Some part of Control Data

Header Data is the Data which is applicable to all the Line items in Billing documents.

The Source of Header Data is

1. Sales Order
2. Delivery
3. Payer
4. Some Part of Configuration Data
5. Some Part of Control Data

Header Data will be controlled by Billing types.

The table for Header data is VBRK.

Item data is the data which is applicable to particular line items.

The source of Item Data is

1. Sales order
2. Delivery
3. Material Master
4. Some part of Configuration Data
5. Some part of Control Data

The Table for Billing Item Data is VBRP

311 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

25032022
Billing type Controls

T-CODE: VOFA
PATH:
SPRO → IMG → Logistics General →

To Create our own Billing type

Click on Position
Select e.g., F2 → Make it HF2
Click on Yes
Enter
Save it

To determine our Billing type into Billing document

Go to Sales Document type controls (VOV8)
Go to HOR (for e.g.,)
Go to Details
Change Delivery related Billing type & Order Billing Type

Enter & save it.

BILLING TYPE CONTROLS

Number Range Internal assignment:

Why External number is not available for Billing types?

In Billing types External number is not available because it is a Legal requirement that Billing
document number should be in a sequence.
The T-Code to define number ranges for Billing document is VN01.

Item Number Increment:

This field controls How the Line-item number should be incremented in Billing Document.

312 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SD Document Category:

This field controls the functioning of the Billing documents.

SD Document Category controls the accounting entry.

Billing type SD Doc Cat Accounting Entry

Customer A/C Dr
F2 M
To Revenue A/C Cr
Revenue A/C Dr
RE, G2 O
To Customer A/C Cr
F5, F8 U No Accounting Entry

Where is the control that for Proforma invoice System will not generate accounting document?
Maintain SD Document category as “U” in Billing type controls.

Posting Block:

If we check this then system will not generate accounting document automatically. User has to post
it manually.

To post the Invoicing Values into Accounting manually

T-Code: VFX3
Mention Sales org: H100 and Execute
(System will display the accounting entries)
FI Consultants will check the entries manually and release the documents.

Statistics:

This field controls whether to update the Invoice data into LIS (Logistics Information System) repots
or not.

If we check this then only the Invoice data will be updated into LIS reports.

313 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Document Type: (FI Accounting Document type)

The standard FI accounting document is RV.

(No need to maintain in the Billing type controls, System will automatically determine it into Invoice)

Negative posting:

This field controls whether to post the negative invoice values into accounting or not.

Invoice List type:

The standard invoice list type is LR.

The T-Code to create invoice list is VF24.

Relevant for rebate:

This field is one of the Pre-requisites to process rebates.

Cancellation billing type:

When we cancel invoice system will determine billing type from here.
314 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

29032022
PRICING

Pricing is based on Condition technique.

Condition technique is the process of determining Condition records into Sales documents.

Condition technique consists of Condition Records and Condition Records will be stored in Condition
Tables. Condition tables will be placed in access sequence from most specific to most general.

Access sequence will be assigned to Condition types and Condition types will be placed in Pricing
procedure.

Condition Technique

Pricing Procedure

Condition Types

Access Sequence

Condition Tables

Condition Records

Condition Records:

It is the Master data for Pricing. We also call it as Pricing Master or Condition Master.
The T-Code for Condition records is VK11.

Condition Tables:

Condition Table is the Combination of fields which will help to maintain Condition Records.
The T-Code to create Condition table is V/03.
In our example we have 3 condition tables

1. Customer/Material
2. Pricelist/Material
3. Material

315 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Access Sequence:

It is a search strategy which will search for the valid condition records from Most specific to Most
General.
We have to place the condition tables in Access Sequence from Most specific to Most General.
If Price is Less that is Most specific and if Price is more that is most general.

The T-Code to create Access sequence is V/07.

Exclusive in Access Sequence:

If we check exclusive, then whenever system find valid condition records system will immediately
come out of the search strategy and determine that price into Sales document.

Example-1:

Sample Data
Specific Customers
Apollo 100551
100552
Dealers Price List
100553 H1
100554 H1
Distributors
100555 H2
100556 H2
Institutions
100557 H3
Apollo 100551 H3
Direct Customers
100558 “ “
100559 “ “
Sample Material VAXINE1500

Access Sequence Exclusive

10 Customer/Material  100551 / VAXINE1500 9500
100552 / VAXINE1500 9500
20 Price List/Material  H1 / VAXINE1500 9800
H2 / VAXINE1500 9700
H3 / VAXINE 1500 9600
30 Material  VAXINE1500 10000

If we check exclusive the result will be

ORDERs
Customer 100553 100551 100557 100559
Material VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
Price 9800 9500 9600 10000

316 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

30032022

Example-2

If we Uncheck Exclusive then even though system finds valid condition records system will not come
out of the search category. System will continue the search in other combinations and if system finds
valid condition records in other combination, then it will determine all and activates the last one and
deactivates the previous one (If it is Base price). If it is discounts then it activates all.

Access Sequence Exclusive

10 Customer/Material “ “ 100551 / VAXINE1500 9500
100552 / VAXINE1500 9500
20 Price List/Material “ “ H1 / VAXINE1500 9800
H2 / VAXINE1500 9700
H3 / VAXINE 1500 9600
30 Material “ “ VAXINE1500 10000

ORDERs
Customer 100553 100551 100552 100557 100559
Material VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
Price 9800  9500  9500  9600  10000 
10000  9600  10000  10000 
10000 

Example-3

Access Sequence Exclusive

10 Customer/Material “ “ 100551 / VAXINE1500 9500
100552 / VAXINE1500 9500
20 Price List/Material  H1 / VAXINE1500 9800
H2 / VAXINE1500 9700
H3 / VAXINE 1500 9600
30 Material “ “ VAXINE1500 10000

ORDERs
Customer 100553 100551 100552 100557 100559
Material VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
Price 9800  9500  9500  9600  10000 
9600  10000 

317 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Condition Types:

Condition types controls the type of Price components or Price element. That is Whether it is Base
price / Discounts / Surcharge / Tax etc.

The standard condition types are

Base Price : PR00

Discounts : K004 Material Discount

: K005 Customer/Material Discount
: K007 Customer Discount
: K020 Price Group Discount

Sur Charge : KF00 Freight (Transportation)

Tax : MWST (Foreign Clients)

: JOIG IGST
: JOCG CGST Indian Clients
: JOSG SGST

The T-Code to define conditions types is V/06.

Pricing Procedure:

Pricing procedure consists of list of all the condition types which are placed in a sequence.

Base Price

Discounts
Gross Value (Base Price – Discounts)

Surcharge
Net Value (Gross Value + Surcharge)

Tax

The T-Code to define Pricing procedure is V/08.

The common T-Code for Pricing is VOK0

318 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Configuration for Pricing (Base Price)

1. Create Condition Tables

T-Code: V/03
Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control → Define
Condition Tables → Double Click on Create Condition Tables

(The user defined Condition table number should be above 500. i.e., 501 to 999)

Press Enter

Field Catalogue consists of List of allowed fields to create Condition Table.

Field catalogue is in Alphabetical Order, go down to select the required field. (Double click to
appear at Right side of the window).

If there is a confusion between the fields in field catalogues, then select the field and go to
Field attributes to select the correct field.

Click on Generate (Shift + F4) after selection the fields.

Press Enter if getting Warning Message “Table XXX is already defined with the same fields”.
Click on Yes.
319 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

We can Save Condition table in Local object or We can save Condition Table in Package.

If we save Condition table in Local object, then System will not generate Request Number.
And Without Request Number, we cannot transport condition table to other servers.

If we want to save Condition table in Package, Mention the Package number ZSDO and click
on Save.

The Condition Table name starts with A and Number.

Condition Table will be saved in Workbench Request.

If we are not getting Request number

Click on Create Request → Mention Description (e.g., Creating Condition Table)
Click on Continue.

All Workbench requests are Cross Client or Client Independent.

320 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Cross Client or Client Independent means, if we Create Condition Table in One Client it
automatically updates in Other Clients within a Server.

DEVELOPMENT SEREVER
Configuration Client - 100 Internal Testing - 200 Technical Client - 300

Condition Table

Package consists of group of enhancements. Package will be provided by Basis consultants.

If we want to save the Table which is saved in Local Object, then in Menu Bar

Click on Goto → Object Directory Entry

If we Save Condition Table in Local object, then How to save in Package?

Go to Change mode of Condition Table
Go to → Object Directory Entry
Procedure:
Go to → Object Directory Entry
Mention the Package ZSD0
save

If the field of not available in field Catalogue, then as a consultant what will we do?
We go to Allowed fields and add the field on allowed fields.

Procedure:
Double Click on Conditions: Allowed fields
Go to New entries and Enter the Field Name
Save

Create 3 Condition Table as per our Example

1. Customer / Material (Table no: 561)
2. Price List / Material (Table no: 565)
3. Material (Table no: 566)

321 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

31032022

Technical View Tab:

This Tab will help us to make the fields in VK11 whether it is Mandatory/Header/Footer etc.

If we check Key field then the system considers that field as a Mandatory field.

If we uncheck Footer System will consider the field as Header.

HEADER

FOOTER

322 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

2. Define Access Sequence:

T-Code: V/07
Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control → Define
Access Sequence → Double Click on Maintain Access Sequences → Click on Continue (Access
Sequence is also Cross Client)
The Standard Access Sequence is PR02
Go to New Entries
Mention
AS : HR00 (Our Name)
Description : BASE PRICE ACCESS SEQUENCE

Select the Access Sequence

Double Click on Accesses

Go to New Entries
Mention
Sequence : 10
Table no : XXX
Check Exclusive
Press Enter & Enter again (If we get a warning message)
Select the Table and Double Click on Fields
Press Enter (If we get warning message “The field assignment has not yet been made”)

Place the remaining tables (Table fields should be disabled) and click on Save

(Access Sequences will be stored in Workbench request)

323 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

3. Define Condition Types:

T-Code: V/06
Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control → Define
Condition Types → Double Click on Maintain Condition Types

The Standard Condition type for Base price is PR00

Select PR00 and Click on Copy As (F6)

Mention our Name (e.g., HR00)

Change the Access Sequence to Ours (e.g., HR00 as created in the system)

Press Enter & Save it

Click on Continue

4. Define Pricing Procedure:

T-Code: V/08
Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control → Define And
Assign Pricing Procedures → Double Click on Maintain Pricing procedures.

The Standard Pricing Procedure is

Go to New Entries (F5)
Mention:
HVAA01 (Our Name) : ALKEM PRICING PROCEDURE
Select the Procedure
Double Click on Control Data

324 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go to New Entries
Step : 10
Condition Type : HR00
Requirement : 2
Account Key : ERL
Press Enter & Save it

5. Pricing Procedure Determination:

T-Code: OVKK
Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Pricing Control → Define And
Assign Pricing Procedures → Double Click on Define Pricing Procedure Determination.

Click on Position
Mention
Sale Org
Distribution Channel
Division
Document Pricing procedure :A
Customer Pricing procedure :1
Enter

Mention our Pricing Procedure and Condition type

Save

Why we Assign Condition type in Pricing procedure determination (OVKK)?

To display or change the price in Line-Item Overview.

Create Sample Data as per the Examples.

6. Maintain Condition Records:

325 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

T-Code: VK11
Mention our Condition type which is defined
Select First Combination ([Link]/Customer/Material)
Press Enter
Mention Sales Org, Customer, Material, Amount
Press Enter & Save it
Maintain Remaining Condition Records as per the sample data.

01042022
Practice:

Go to the T-Code: V/07

Go to our Access Sequence
Select and Double Click on Accesses
Uncheck Exclusive
Enter (We get Warning Messages) & Save
(Practice the Examples as per the Sample Data and the Class Examples)

Errors:

“maximum number of tables reached ( )”

326 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

04042022
PRICING CONFIGURATION FOR DISCOUNTS:

Cond Type Access Seq Condition Table Config

Material Discount K004 H004 Sales Org/Material

Customer/Material Discount K005 H005 Sales Org/Customer/Material

Customer Discount K007 H007 Sales Org/Customer

Price Group Discount K020 H020 Sales Org/Price Group

Step-1: Create Condition Tables:

T-Code: V/03
AS per above scenario we need to create 2 new condition tables
Create tables for
Sales Org/Customer (567)
Sales Org/Price Group (568)

Step-2: Create Access Sequence:

T-Code: V/07
As per above Scenario we need to create 4 access sequences.

Step-3: Create Condition Type

T-Code: V/06
As per above scenario we need to create 4 condition types

Cond Type
Material Discount K004
Calculation Type “C” Quantity
Customer/Material Discount K005
Calculation Type “C” Quantity
Customer Discount K007
Calculation Type “A” Percentage
Price Group Discount K020
Calculation Type “A” Percentage

Create Material Discount Condition type:

T-Code: V/06

Copy K004
Mention
H004 (Material Discount)
Access Sequence H004
Press Enter & Save

327 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Create Customer/Material Discount Condition type:

T-Code: V/06

Copy K005
Mention
H005 (Customer/material Discount)
Access Sequence H005
Press Enter & Save

Create Customer Discount Condition type:

T-Code: V/06

Copy K007
Mention
H007 (Customer Discount)
Access Sequence H007
Press Enter & Save

Create Price group Discount Condition type:

T-Code: V/06

Copy K020
Mention
H020 (Price group Discount)
Access Sequence H020
Press Enter & Save

Step: 4 Place Discount Condition types in Pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Step Cond Type Description From To Stats Requirement Acc Key

10 HR00 2 ERL
20 Base Val 10 
30 H004 20 2 ERS
40 H005 20 2 ERS
50 H007 20 2 ERS
60 H020 20 2 ERS
70 Gross Val 20 69 

T-Code: V/08

Select our Pricing procedure

Double Click on Control
Go to New entries
Mention as per the above table & Save

328 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step: 5 Maintain Condition Records for Discounts

T-Code: VK11

Material Discount H004 VAXINE1500 100

Customer/Material Discount H005 100551/VAXINE1500 500
100552/VAXINE1500 500
Customer Discount H007 100551 10%
100552 10%

Price Group H020 H1 5%

H2 6%
H3 7%
100553-H1
100554-H1
100555-H2
100556-H2
100557-H3
100551-H3

Example:

ORDER ORDER ORDER ORDER

Customer 100551 100552 100553
Material VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
H004 100 100 100
H005 500 500
H007 10% 10%
H020 7% 5%

329 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Header Discounts

Header Discount is the discount which is applicable to all the line items in Sales document.
Header Discount does not have Access Sequence.
Header Discount should be always processed manually.

The standard Header Discount condition types are

HB00 : Header Fixed Discount

HA00 : Header Percentage Discount

Place Header Discount Condition types in Pricing procedure

Step Cond Description From To Manual Stats Requirement Acc Key

Type
10 HR00 2 ERL
20 Base Val 10 
30 H004 20 2 ERS
40 H005 20 2 ERS
50 H007 20 2 ERS
60 H020 20 2 ERS
61 HB00 20  2 ERS
62 HA00 20  2 ERS
70 Gross Val 20 69 

Go to our Pricing procedure (V/08)

Select Our Pricing Procedure

Double click on Control & Place the Header conditions as per the above table.
Save.

To process Header discounts, Maintain price for few more Materials.

Create Order (T-Code: VA01)

Enter Multiple Materials → Go to Header data → Conditions tab

Scroll down and enter the conditions manually
Select the Condition line and click on Activate.

Now the Discount will be applied on all the line items proportionately (Distributed
among all the line items)

330 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

05042022

Configuration for Common Discount:

Condition Type Access Sequence

HCOM HCOM

Condition Tables Condition Tables

10 623 Sales Org/Customer 10 567 Sales Org/Customer
20 624 Sales Org/Price group 20 568 Sales Org/Price group
30 618 Sales Org/Customer/material 30 561 Sales Org/Customer/material
40 622 Sales Org/Material 40 566 Sales Org/Material

Step-1: Create Access Sequence:

T-Code: V/07
Go to New Entries
Mention
HCOM : Common Discount
Select the Access Sequence & Double click on Accesses
Click on New Entries
Maintain the Tables

Step-2: Create Condition Type:

T-Code: V/06
Click on position, Search for K007
Copy K007 and Mention
Condition Type : HCOM (Common Discount)
Access Seq : HCOM
Enter & Save

Step-3: Create Pricing Procedure:

T-Code: V/08
Go to New Entries
Define our own Pricing procedure
E.g., HVAA02 ALKEM PRICING COMMON DISCOUNT
Select the Pricing Procedure & Double Click on Control
Go to New Entries

Step Cond Description From To Manual Stats Requirement Acc Key

Type
10 HR00 2 ERL
20 Base Val 10 
30 HCOM 20 2 ERS
40 Gross Val 20 39 

331 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-4: Assign Pricing Procedure

T-Code: OVKK
Click on Position
Go to our Sales Area
Change the Pricing procedure to HVAA02
Save it

Step-5: Maintain Condition Records

100551 10% 7200000501 10%

100552 10% 7200000502 10%
H1 5% 1U 5%
H2 6% 2U 6%
H3 7% 3U 7%
100551/VAXINE1500 4% 7200000501/NAV1015 4%
100552/VAXINE1500 4% 7200000502/NAV1015 4%
VAXXINE1500 2% NAV1015 2%

Maintain the Condition records as per the table above with our own Customer & Materials.

Go to the T-Code: VK11

Mention Condition Type: HCOM & Enter

Select Sales Org/Customer Combination
Mention Customer Discounts
Save
Go Back Click on Key combination
Select Sales Org/Price Group Combination
Mention the Price groups and Discounts
Save
Go Back and Click on Key combination
Select Sales Org/Customer/Material Combination
Mention Discounts for Customer & Material combination
Go Back and Click on Key Combination
Select Sales Org/Material
Mention Material Discounts
Save it

Example if Exclusive check:

ORDER ORDER ORDER ORDER ORDER

CUSTOMER 100551 100552 100555 100559
MATERIAL VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
HCOM 10%  10%  6%  2% 

332 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Example if Exclusive is uncheck/Blank:

ORDER ORDER ORDER ORDER ORDER

CUSTOMER 100551 100552 100555 100559
MATERIAL VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
HCOM 10%  10%  6%  2% 
HCOM 7%  4%  2% 
HCOM 4%  2% 
HCOM 2% 

333 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

06042022

Configuration for Surcharge (Additional Charge):

Examples of Surcharges are

- Freight Charge (Transportation Charges)

- Insurance
- Loading Charge
- Packing Charge

Cond Type Access Seq Condition Table Combi Table

Freight Charge HF00 (KF00) KF00 (KF00) [Link]/Incoterms1/Incoterms2
[Link]/Incoterms1
Calculation Type: “D” Gross Weight
Insurance HINS HINS [Link]/Incoterms1/Incoterms2
[Link]/Incoterms1
Calculation Type: “A” Percentage
Packing HPAC HPAC [Link]/Material
Calculation Type: “C” Quantity
Loading HLOD HLOD [Link]/Material
Calculation Type: “C” Quantity

Step-1: Create Condition Tables

As per above scenario we need to create 2 new condition tables.

1. Sales Org/Incoterms1/Incoterms2
2. Sales Org/Incoterms1

T-Code: V/03: Create the tables as per the above scenario

Step-2: Create Access Sequence

As per above scenario we need to create 4 access sequences

1. KF00 Freight Access Sequence

2. HINS Insurance Access Sequence
3. HPAC Packing Access Sequence
4. HLOD Loading Access Sequence

T-Code: V/07: Create the Access Sequence as per the above scenario

Step-3: Create Condition types

As per the above scenario we need to create 4 condition types

1. HF00
2. HINS
3. HPAC
4. HLOD

334 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

T-Code: V/06:

Create Freight Condition type → Copy KF00

Mention HF00, Change the Access Sequence to HF00

Enter & Save

Create Insurance Condition type → Copy KF00

Mention HINS, Change the Access Sequence to HINS

Change the Calculation type :A
Remove Condition Category :F
Enter & Save

Create Packing condition type → Copy KF00

Mention HPAC, Change the Access Sequence to HPAC

Change the Calculation type :C
Remove Condition Category :F
Enter & Save

Create Loading Condition type → Copy KF00

Mention HLOD, Change the Access Sequence to HLOD

Change the Calculation type :C
Remove Condition Category :F
Enter & Save

Step-4: Place condition types in Pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Before Pricing procedure, we need to Define Account keys for Insurance, Packing, Loading

Path to Define Account keys:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Account assignment costing → Revenue
account determination → Define and Assign Account Keys → Double click on Define Account
Key

Click on New entries

Mention
Save

335 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go to V/08: Select our Pricing Procedure

Double click on control → Click on New Entries and place Step 80 to 120

Step Cond Description From To Manual Stats Reqrmt Acc. Key

Type
10 HR00 2 ERL
20 Base Val 10 
30 H004 20 2 ERS
40 H005 20 2 ERS
50 H007 20 2 ERS
60 H020 20 2 ERS
61 HB00 20  2 ERS
62 HA00 
70 Gross Val 20 69 
80 HF00 70 2 ERF
90 HINS 70 2 HIN
100 HPAC 70 2 HPC
110 HLOD 70 2 HLO
120 Net value 70 119 

Gross Value : Bae Value - Discount

Net Value : Gross Value + Sur Charge

Assign Pricing procedure HVAA01 in T-Code: OVKK

Step-5: Maintain Condition Record

T-Code: VK11

Mention Condition type : HF00

Select Sales Org./Incoterms combination & Enter
Mention Sales Organisation
Incoterms : CIF
Amount : 10
Save

Mention Condition type : HINS

Select Sales Org./Incoterms combination & Enter
Mention Sales Organisation
Incoterms : CIF
Amount : 3%
Save

Mention Condition type : HPAC

Select Sales Org./Material combination & Enter
Mention Sales Organisation
Material : VAXI1500
Amount : 50
Save

336 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Mention Condition type : HLOD

Select Sales Org./Material & Enter
Mention Sales Organisation
Material : VAXI1500
Amount : 30
Save

07042022

Configure Pricing for Tax:

Step-1: Place Tax condition type MWST in pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Step Cond Description From To Manual Stats Reqrmt Acc. Key

Type
10 HR00 2 ERL
20 Base Val 10 
30 H004 20 2 ERS
40 H005 20 2 ERS
50 H007 20 2 ERS
60 H020 20 2 ERS
61 HB00 20  2 ERS
62 HA00 
70 Gross Val 20 69 
80 HF00 70 2 ERF
90 HINS 70 2 HIN
100 HPAC 70 2 HPC
110 HLOD 70 2 HLO
120 Net value 70 119 
130 MWST 120 10 MWS

Go to the T-Code – V/08

Select the Pricing procedure

Double click on control
Go to new entries
Enter Step 130 as per the above table & Save
Step-2:

Go to the T-Code: OVK1

Click on Position → Search for Country “IN”, Sequence “1”

Mention Tax category – MWST
Remove remaining IN sequences & Save
Step-3:

Go to Customer Master & Material Master

Maintain Tax classification as “1”

337 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-4: Create Tax Code

T-Code: FTXP
Mention
Country : IN
Enter
Enter Tax Code : H1 & Enter
Enter & Save

Step-5: Maintain Condition Record for Tax

T-code: VK11

Mention Condition Type: MWST & Enter

Select Domestic Taxes & Continue
Mention
Country : IN

Save

Pracctice:

Create the Order and check the TAX

338 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Configure TAX with new tables & Condition types:

Step-1: Create new condition table for TAX

T-Code: V/03

Create Table with

Country (Departure Country)
Tax classification 1-Customer
Tax classification-Material

Step-2: Create Access Sequence

T-Code: V/07

New Entries : HWST TAX ACCESS SEQUENCE

Select the Access Sequence & Double click on Accesses
Go to New Entries
No. Table Exclusive
10 627 
Select the table and double click on field
Save

Step-3: Create Condition types

T-Code: V/06

Click on Position & Copy MWST

Mention our Name e.g., HWST Output Tax HWST
Change the Access Sequence to HWST
Enter & Save

Step-4: Place the Condition type in Pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Select the Pricing procedure

Double click on control
Change Step no-130 to MWST to HWST
Enter & Save

Step-5: Define Tax determination rules

Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Taxes → Define Tax determination rules
Click on position go to Country “IN”, Sequence “1” change the Tax category HWST

339 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-6: Define Tax relevancy of Master records

Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Taxes → Define Tax Relevancy of Master
records
Double click on Customer taxes
Go to new entries & Mention
Save
Go back and Double click on Material Taxes
Go to New entries
Mention
Save

Step-7

Go to Customer Master and Maintain Tax classification as “1”

Go to Material Master and Maintain Tax classification as “1”

Step-8: Maintain Condition records for Tax

T-Code: VK11

Mention Condition Type: HWST & Enter

Select Domestic Taxes & Continue
Mention the Country : IN
Tax Classification1-Cust : 1

Save

Create Order and Check the Tax

340 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

08042022

CONDITION TYPE CONTROLS

T-Code: V/06

Go to our Condition type HR00

Access Sequence:

We have to assign Access sequence in Condition type controls.

Records for Access:

This will help to display the list of all condition records in that Access sequence.

Condition Class:

This field controls the type of Price component/Price element. i.e., Whether it is Base
price/Discounts/Surcharge/Tax etc.

B Base Price
A Discount/Sur Charge
D Tax
C Expense Reimbursement (Rebates)

Where is the control that system will not activate multiple Base price condition types?
Condition Class “B”

Where is the Control that Tax amount will not be added to Net value?
Condition Class “D”

There is a Condition type which is statistical but still I want to post it into some G/L account. Where
is the control?
Condition class “C” along with Accruals “ERU”

341 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Plus/Minus:

This field controls whether to add the condition type amount or whether to deduct the condition
type amount.
Discounts we maintain Plus/minus as “X” → “X” means negative.
Other condition type Plus/minus is “Blank” / ”A”→ “Blank/”A” means positive.

Calculation type:

This will to convert to Condition type amount to Condition type value.

Calculation types
C Quantity
A Percentage
B Fixed Amount
D Gross Weight

Condition Category:

It is a sub classification of Condition class

342 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

HR00 VPRS EK01 EK02

Condition Class “B” “B” “B” “B”
Condition Category “ “ “G” “Q” “Q”
Selling Price Manufact. Cost Product Cost Product Cost
Condition category will have relationship with Pricing type field in copy controls.

Quotation 12.03.2022 New Price 12.03.2022

HR00 10000 HR00 12000
Manual HB00 -500 H007 -12%
H007 -10% HF00 1500
HF00 1200 HWST 22%
HWST 20% VPRS 5500
VPRS 4500

Pricing Type “B” (Carryout New Pricing):

Order 08.04.2022
If Pricing type is “B”, then System will determine new
HR00 12000
price into target document and eliminate manual
H007 -12%
condition types.
HF00 1500
HWST 22%
VPRS 5500

Pricing Type “C” (Copy Manual Pricing Element and Redetermine others):

If Pricing type is “C”, then System will copy the Manual Order 08.04.2022
condition types as it is and redetermine others. HR00 12000
HB00 -500
H007 -12%
HF00 1500
HWST 22%
VPRS 5500

Pricing Type “D” (Copy Pricing Elements unchanged):

If Pricing type is “D”, then System will copy the Price as Order 08.04.2022
it is from Source document to target document. HR00 10000
HB00 -500
H007 -10%
HF00 1200
HWST 20%
VPRS 4500

343 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

11042022

Pricing Type “G” (Copy Pricing Elements unchanged and Redetermine others):

If Pricing type is “G”, then system will copy the price as Order 08.04.2022
it is from Source document to target document and HR00 10000
redetermine only Taxes. HB00 -500
H007 -10%
Pricing type “G” will redetermine only those condition
HF00 1200
types for which condition category is “D”.
HWST 22%
All Tax condition types we maintain condition category VPRS 4500
as “D”.

Pricing Type “H” (Redetermine only Freight):

If Pricing type is “H”, then System will copy the price as Order 08.04.2022
it is from Source document to target document and HR00 10000
redetermine only Freight. HB00 -500
H007 -10%
If Pricing type is “H”, system will redetermine only HF00 1500
those condition types for which condition category is “F” HWST 20%
VPRS 4500
Only Freight condition types we maintain condition
category “F”

Pricing Type “N” (Redetermine only cost):

If Pricing type is “N”, then System will copy price as it is Order 08.04.2022
from source document to target document and HR00 10000
redetermine only cost. HB00 -500
H007 -10%
If pricing type is “N”, system will redetermine only HF00 1200
those condition types for which condition category is HWST 20%
“G”/ ”Q” VPRS 5500
VPRS condition category is “G”

EK01 & EK02 condition category is “Q”

Pricing Type Condition Cat

G D Tax
H F Freight
N G/Q Cost

344 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Rounding Rules:

This field controls whether to perform Commercial rounding/Round up/Round down.

“ “ Blank means Commercial Rounding (if it is less than .5 it will take the below number and .5 and
above it will take next number)
A means Round up, B means Round down

Structure Condition:

Structure condition will help to cumulate the values of components and display it main item.

BOM Header Pricing KUMU 16000

Computer PR00 15000
CPU 08000
Monitor 06000
Keyboard 01000
Mouse 01000

We maintain Structure condition only for KUMU condition type.

KUMU is cumulation condition.

For KUMU condition type we maintain structure condition as “B”

“B” means cumulation condition

Group Condition:

Order Group of Material

Total Doc Value 10 Lakhs and above Group 1
If group of Material
X
value is 10L and above
Discount 20000 Y
Discount 15000
Z

345 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

If we want to consider the total document value or some group of materials value to propose the
discount then we go for group condition concept

12042022

Group Condition Routine:

This field control whether to consider total document value or some group of Materials value.

1 – Total Document Value

3 – Group of Materials Value

Rounding Difference Comparison:

If we check this; then while distributing condition amount among all the line items, if there is any left
amount then that will be added to highest value item.

Order Group of Material

Total Doc Value 10 Lakhs and above Group 1
If group of Material value is
X
10L and above Discount
Discount 20000 Y
15000
Z
10 A 2L 4000
20 B 3L 6000
30 C 5L 10000

If we check group condition then the group condition value will be distributed among all the line
items in proportionate to the value of the line items.

346 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Configure Group condition for total document value:

Example:

Client’s requirement is If the total document value reaches to 10 Lakhs, then they want to offer
Rs.20000 discount.

Step-1: Create Condition Table

Create Condition Table with the combination of Only Sales organization (As per the Example)

(If we want the discount for specific customer, then create the Condition table with the combination
of Sales Organization and the Customer)

T-Code: V/03

Select Sales Organization and generate the Table

Step-2: Create Access Sequence

T-Code: V/07

New Entries → Create Condition

E.g., HGR1 Group Condition Total Doc Val → Enter
Select the Access Sequence → Double Click on Accesses
Go to New Entries

Mention the Table no.

Select the table double click on Table and Save.

Step-3: Create Condition type

T-Code: V/06

Copy K007 (Standard) and rename as HGR1 (Class) →

Change
Access Sequence HGR1 (Class)
Calculation type “B”
Check Group Condition 
Group Condition Routine 1
Check Rounding diff Comp 
Scale basis “B”
Enter & Save

347 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-4: Place the Condition type in Pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Select our Pricing Procedure HVAA01 (Class) → Double Click on Control

Place the Condition type in between Step no. 20 to 70

Step-5: Maintain Condition Records

T-Code: VK11

Mention the Condition type HGR1 (Class) & Enter

Mention
Sales Org H100
Discount 20000

Select the Condition Records → GO to Scales

Mention the Scale Value Rs. 1000000

Enter & Save

Practice:

Create Order and Check the Discount in Conditions tab.

348 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Configuration for Group of Materials

Example:

Clients’ requirement is if customer purchased X, Y, Z materials of 10 Lakh value, then he will get the
discount of Rs.15000

Create 3 Materials & Maintain Price (Base Price)

Step-1: Create Condition Table

T-Code: V/03

Create Table with the combination of Sales Org & Material pricing group

Ste-2: Create Access Sequence

T-Code: V/07

Go to New entries → Mention HGR2 (Class) Group condition group of Mat

Select the Access Sequence and Double click on Access Sequences
Go to New entries and mention

Select the Line and double click on Table

Step-3: Create Condition type

T-Code: V/06

Copy K007 (Standard) and change it to HGR2 (Class) Grp Cond Grp of Mat
Change
Access Sequence : HGR2
Calculation Type : “B”
Check Grp Condition :
Grp Conf Routine :3
Check Round diff comp : 
Scale basis : “B”
Enter & Save

Step-4: Place the Conditions type in Pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Go to our Pricing Procedure → Select and double click on Control

Place the condition type in between Base value & Gross Value
Mention

349 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Save

Step-5: Maintain condition record

T-Code: VK11

Mention the condition type HGR2 (Class) & Enter

Mention the Material Pricing Group S1 (Select any group for practice) and Mention the
Discount Rs.15000

Select the Condition record → Go to Scales

Mention the Scale Value Rs. 1000000

Step-6:

Go to the group of Materials and mention the Material pricing group (Sales Org.2) as S1 (As created
in Condition records)

Practice:

Create Order and check for the discount in Conditions tab.

350 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

13042022

Changes Which can be made:

Manual Entries:

This field controls whether to change the condition type amount and Value in Sales document or
not.
If we want to change Condition type amount and value in Sales document, then Manual entries as
blank or “C”.
If we don’t want to change Condition type and amount and value in Sales document, then maintain
manual entries as “D”.

Amount/Percent, Value, Delete, Calculation type:

If Manual entries is Blank or “C”, then further we have control Whether to change amount, whether
to change value/ whether to delete the condition type/whether to change the calculation type.
If we want to change/ delete then Check, If we don’t want to change/ delete then uncheck.

Header Condition:

It is a condition which is applicable to all the line items in Sales document.

Header condition is the condition which does not have Access sequence. Header Condition is the
condition which should be always entered manually.

Item Condition:

351 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Item Condition is the condition which is specific to particular line item in Sales document.

Item condition can have Access sequence.

Item conditions can be processed automatically.

Master Data

Valid from, Valid to:

This will help to propose default validity periods while creating condition records.

Pricing Procedure:

The Pricing procedure in condition type controls is for condition supplement.

Condition Supplement:
Condition supplement means adding one condition record to another condition record and If the
main condition record determines, then only the supplement condition record will be determined.

Example:

BASIC PRICE CONDITION TYPE HR00

1 Customer/Material 100551/VAXINE1500 9500
100552/VAXINE1500 9500
2 Price list/Material H1/VAXINE1500 9800
H2/VAXINE1500 9700
H3/VAXINE1500 9600
3 Material VAXINE1500 10000
HSUP -2%

352 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

ORDERS
Customer 100551 100555 100559
Material VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500 VAXINE1500
HR00 9500 9700 10000
HSUP No No -2%

Configuration for Condition Supplement:

Step-1: Create Supplement condition type

T-Code: V/06

Copy K007 (Standard) and Rename as HSUP (Class) SUPPLEMENT CONDITION

Remove Access Sequence
Enter & Save

Step-2: Place the Condition type in Pricing procedure

T-Code: V/08

Place the Condition type in between Base value and Gross value.
Go to our Pricing procedure HVAA01 (Class)
Double click on Control
Go to New entries

Enter & Save

Step-3: Create New pricing procedure for Supplement

T-Code: V/08

Go to New entries
Mention HSUP01 SUPPLEMENT PRICING PROCEDURE
Select the procedure & Double click on control
Go to new entries & mention

Step-4: Go to Main condition type HR00 (Class) and mention Supplement pricing procedure.

353 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-5: Go to Change mode of condition record VK12

Mention HR00

Go to Material combination
Select the Condition record and click on Arrow

Mention HSUP as 2%

Enter & Save

Practice:
Create Order and check the Supplement condition

354 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

14042022

Delete from Data base:

This field controls whether to delete the Condition record permanently from Data base or not.

Blank means Do not Delete (Set the Deletion flag only)

Blank means it will not delete Condition record permanently from Data base.

If we want to delete the Condition record permanently from Data base, then maintain “A”.

Practice:
If we maintain BLANK
Go to VK12 → Mention HR00 → Select Material Combination →
Mention the Sales Org & Material → Execute
Select the Record and Click on Delete
When we click on Delete System will give a message
“Deletion indicator for condition record has been set”
Save

Create Order for Customer & Material combination

Check the Condition Record → HR00 will be missing
Go to Analysis and Check

Go to VK12 and check the Condition record (It will not get deleted from the Data base)
If we want to uncheck the Deletion Record
Select the Condition Record → Go to details
And Uncheck Deletion Indicator

If we maintain “A”

Go to VK12 → Mention HR00 → Select Material Combination →

Mention the Sales Org & Material → Execute
Select the Record and Click on Delete
When we click on Delete System will give a message

If we click on Yes then the condition record will be deleted permanently from Data Base.
“We always maintain Delete from Data base as Blank”

355 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Condition Index:

Condition Index will help to display or change the list of all condition records at one place.

Configuration for Condition Index:

T-Code: OV09

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Pricing → Maintain Condition Index → Double
click on Maintain condition tables for Index

Go to Create mode & Enter

Create the Table with Sales Org

Click on Text symbol and Change the Description (H100 Sales Org)

Generate the Table → Mention the Package ZSD0 and Save it. → Click on Continue.

We have to create the Condition records to see the result as it is the new table. Existing records will
not get updated into this table.
(Generally, we do this steep at the starting of the Project in real time scenario)

Go to VK11 → Maintain the Condition Records as per our Example (HR00 Base type Condition Records)

The T-Code to display Condition Index is V/I6

The T-Code to Change Condition Index is V/I5

Condition Update:

Restricting the Condition records up to particular quantity/Value/No. of Orders.

356 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Example:

Clients’ requirement is they want to offer Rs.4000 discount for first 10000 Quantity.

Configuration for Condition Update for above example:

Step-1: Create New condition type (T-Code: V/06)

Copy K004 (Standard)

Rename as HUPP CONDITION UPDATE (Class)

Change the Access Sequence to H004 (Class)
Check Condition update
Enter & Save

Step-2: Place the Condition type in Pricing procedure (T-Code: V/08)

Go to our Pricing procedure HVAA01 (Class) & Double click on Control

Place the Condition type in between Base Value and Gross Value

Go to New Entries & Mention

Enter & Save

Step-3: Maintain Condition Records for Condition update (T-Code: VK11)

Mention the Condition type HUPP

Mention the Sales Org, Material, Discount

Select the Condition & Go to Additional Data

Mention Max. Cond. base value -10000 & Save

357 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

How System cumulates the Quantities in Condition update concept?

Info Structure S071 :T-Code: OMO1 (To see the Info Structure)

Can we give Discount for first 100 Orders?

SAP restricts number of Orders only up to 3 (If we want to give Discount after first 3 orders SAP will
not allow. We have this control in Condition update)

18042022

Reference Condition Type:

Any Condition type if we maintain Reference Condition type, then whatever the condition records
we maintain for reference Condition type. The same will be applicable to main condition type.

We maintain Reference Condition type only for “IV01” Condition type.

For “IV01” Condition type we maintain Reference Condition type as “PI01”

So, whatever the Condition records we maintain for “PI01” the same will be applicable to “IV01”.

“IV01” and “PI01” are intercompany Condition types.

In Intercompany process we maintain Condition records for PI01 and the Same will be applicable to
“IV01” because for “IV01” we maintain reference condition type as “PI01”.

Scales: From Qty Amount

Scales means maintaining the Price in Slab system. 0 10000
Example: 100 9950
200 9900
300 9850
400 9800
Scale basis: 500 9750
This field controls on what basis the Slab Price should be maintained. i.e., based on
Quantity/Value/Weight.

B Value Scale
C Quantity Scale
D Gross weight scale

358 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Check Value:

This field controls whether the Slab price should Decrease or Increase.

“ “ None
A Descending
B Ascending

Scale type:

This field controls whether to go for From Scale /To-scale/Graduated scale.

Blank A Base-scale
B To-scale
D Graduated scale

SCALE TYPE “ “ OR “A” SCALE TYPE “B” SCALE TYPE “D”

(To Scale) (Graduated Scale)
Scales Scales Scales
From Qty Amount To Qty Amount To Qty Amount
0 10000 100 10000 100 10000
100 9950 200 9950 200 9950
200 9900 300 9900 300 9900
300 9850 400 9850 400 9850
400 9800 500 9800 500 9800
500 9750 600 9750 600 9750

ORDER ORDER ORDER

Qty Amount Qty Amount Qty Amount
350 9850 350 9850 350
100 10000
100 9950
100 9900
50 9850

In Graduated Scales System considers each Slab price up to the Order Qty

359 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Practice for Scales:

SCALE TYPE “ “ OR “A” From Qty Amount

0 10000
Maintain Scale type as “A” in HR00 Condition type
100 9950
Go to Condition Records and Maintain Scales
200 9900
T-Code: VK11 300 9850
400 9800
Mention Condition type “HR00” (Class) → Select Sales org./Material 500 9750
Enter & Mention
Sales Org : H100 (Class) ORDER
Material : VAXINE1500 (Class) Qty Amount
Amount : 10000 350 9850
Enter → Select the Line → Click on Scales (F2)

Mention as per the Reference table

Save & Continue

Create Order as per the Reference Table

T-Code: VA01 Customer : 100559 (Class, Material Combination Customer)

Qty : 350
Check the Conditions tab → System Should pick HR00 Price Rs.9850

To Qty Amount
SCALE TYPE “B” (To Scale) 100 10000
Maintain Scale type as “B” in HR00 Condition type 200 9950
Go to Condition Records and Maintain Scales 300 9900
400 9850
T-Code: VK11 500 9800
600 9750
Mention Condition type “HR00” (Class) → Select Sales org./Material
Enter & Mention
ORDER
Sales Org : H100 (Class) Qty Amount
Material : VAXINE1500 (Class) 350 9850
Amount : 10000
Enter → Select the Line → Click on Scales (F2)

Mention as per the Reference table

Save & Continue

Create Order as per the Reference Table

T-Code: VA01 Customer : 100559 (Class, Material Combination Customer)

Qty : 350
Check the Conditions tab → System Should pick HR00 Price Rs.9850

360 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

SCALE TYPE “D” (Graduated Scale) To Qty Amount

100 10000
Maintain Scale type as “D” in HR00 Condition type 200 9950
Go to Condition Records and Maintain Scales 300 9900
T-Code: VK11 400 9850
500 9800
Mention Condition type “HR00” (Class) → Select Sales org./Material 600 9750
Enter & Mention
Sales Org : H100 (Class) ORDER
Material : VAXINE1500 (Class) Qty Amount
Amount : 10000 350
Enter → Select the Line → Click on Scales (F2) 100 10000
100 9950
Mention as per the Reference table 100 9900
Save & Continue 50 9850
Create Order as per the Reference Table

T-Code: VA01 Customer : 100559 (Class, Material Combination Customer)

Qty : 350
Check the Conditions tab

System will propose different line items as per the table with different slab prices.

What Scenarios System activates Multiple Base price condition types?

Graduated Scales.

Exclusion:

Any Condition type if we maintain Exclusion and if that Condition type determines into Sales
document, then it eliminates the below condition types for which we have same requirement “2”.

Practice:

Go to Pricing procedure HVAA01 → Check the Condition types for which requirement type is “2”

Go to (V/06) → H004 → Maintain Exclusion “X” → Create Order and Check the Conditions tab

Result:

361 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

As we maintain Exclusion “X” for H004 System will eliminate remaining Condition types and propose
only H004.
Tax Cannot be eliminated, because the requirement is different (Other than “2”)

Exclusion cannot eliminate Supplement conditions

We can maintain Exclusion in 2 places
Condition Types (V/06)
Condition Records (VK11) → Details

Exclusion Groups

Grouping of Multiple Conditions types into One and proposing the best condition or the least
condition.

Configuration for Exclusion groups:

Exclusion Groups for Best Condition:

Step-1: Define Condition types for the Exclusion Groups

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Pricing → Condition Exclusion → Condition
Exclusion for Groups of Conditions → Double Click on Define Condition Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries & Mention

Save

Step-2: Assign Condition types to the Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries & Mention

Save

Step-3: Maintain condition procedure for Pricing procedures

Select our Pricing Procedure & Double Click on Exclusion

Go to New Entries & Mention

Save

Create Order and See the Result. (H007 will be active and remaining will become inactive).

362 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

19042022

Exclusion Groups for Least Condition:

If we want the Least Condition type to be activated then

Mention Condition Exclusion Procedure as “L”

Exclusion Groups between Two Groups:

Step-1: Define Condition types for the Exclusion Groups

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Pricing → Condition Exclusion → Condition
Exclusion for Groups of Conditions → Double Click on Condition Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries → Mention

HGR2 GROUP2 Save

Step-2: Assign Condition types to the Exclusion Groups

Click on Position → Go to HGR1 → Remove H005 & H020

Go to New Entries and Maintain

Save.

Go Back

Step-3: Maintain condition procedure for Pricing procedures

Select our Pricing Procedure HVAA01 (Class) & Double Click on Exclusion

Mention Condition Exclusion Procedure as “C”

Save

Practice:
Create Order for 100551 (Class) Customer and Check the Conditions tab and the Result will be

363 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

For Least Condition type we have to maintain Condition Exclusion Procedure as “F”.

In Same Condition type if we have multiple Table combination and If we do not know the Most
Specific and Most General then we maintain Condition Exclusion Procedure as “B”

Condition Exclusion Procedure “B”

Condition Exclusion Procedure “B” determines best condition within the condition type.

(If we do not know the Most Specific and Most General in Access Sequence)

Go to Access Sequence V/07 → HR00 Condition type → Uncheck Exclusive

Step-1: Define Condition types for the Exclusion Groups

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Pricing → Condition Exclusion → Condition
Exclusion for Groups of Conditions → Double Click on Condition Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries

HGR3 GROUP 3
Save

Step-2: Assign Condition types to the Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries and Mention

Save.

Go Back.

Step-3: Maintain condition procedure for Pricing procedures

Select our Pricing Procedure HVAA01 (Class) & Double Click on Exclusion

Mention Condition Exclusion Procedure as “B” and Maintain

Save

Practice:

Create Order and Check the Conditions tab, Result will be

364 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Condition Exclusion Procedure “D” : “D” - Exclusive

Condition Exclusion Procedure “D” is for Group Conditions

Step-1: Define Condition types for the Exclusion Groups

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Pricing → Condition Exclusion → Condition
Exclusion for Groups of Conditions → Double Click on Condition Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries

H100 GRP COND 1

H200 GRP COND 2
Save

Step-2: Assign Condition types to the Exclusion Groups

Go to New Entries and Mention

Save.

Go Back.

Step-3: Maintain condition procedure for Pricing procedures

Select our Pricing Procedure HVAA01 (Class) & Double Click on Exclusion

Mention Condition Exclusion Procedure as “D” and Maintain

Save

Practice:

Create Order and Check the Conditions tab, Result will be

365 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
 CAL BASE
STEP COUNTER COND TYPE DESCRIPTION FROM TO MAN REQ STAT PRINT SUB TOTAL RQRMNT ACC KEY ACCRUALS
TYPE TYP
SAP-SD

10 HR00 2 ERL

366 | P a g e
20 BASE VALUE 10 

30 H004 20 2 ERS

40 H005 20 2 ERS

50 H007 20 2 ERS

60 H020 20 2 ERS

70 GROSS VALUE 20 69 

80 HF00 70 2 ERF

90 HINS 70 2 HIN

100 HPAC 70 2 HPC

110 HLOD 70 2 HLO

16 FIELDS OF PRICING PROCEDURE

120 NET VALUE 70 119 

130 HWST 120 10 16 MWS

PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
RAVI BERI
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step:

Step number specifies the sequence of the condition type in Pricing procedure.
Step number will also to be used in FROM & TO to determine the Base value.

Counter:

We use counter if there is no space between the steps to add one more condition type.

STEP COUNTER COND TYP

1 HR00
2
3 H004
3 1
4 H005
5 H007
6 H020
7
8 HF00
9 HINS
10 HPAC
11 HLOD
12
13 HWST

Condition Type:

Condition Type controls the type of Price component or Price element.

i.e., Whether it is Base Price/Discounts/Sur Charge/Tax etc.

Description:

Description will be used to bifurcate the Pricing Structure.

i.e., Bae Value, Gross Value, Net Value etc.
All Bifurcation steps should be Statistical.

From:

From is the Standard Base.

From will help to determine the Base Value to calculate Condition value.

To:

To will be used to cumulate the values of multiple steps which are in a sequence.

20042022
367 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Manual:

Any Condition type if we check Manual, then that Condition type will not be determined
automatically into Sales document. User has to enter it manually.

Practice:
Check Manual for H007 condition type → Create Order → Check the Conditions Tab for that
Condition type

The Result will be H007 will not be determined into Sales document.

Then Click on insert → Mention the Condition type & Press Enter

There is a Condition type which is Manual but after entering the Condition type system should not
allow to change amount and value. Where is the control?
Manual Entries should be Blank or “C” and Uncheck amount & Uncheck Value.

Required:

Any Condition type if we check required and if that Condition type is missing in Sales document, then
system will not allow to save the Sales document.

Statistics:

If we check Statistics, then the Condition type value does not have any effect on Net value.
If we check Statistics, then the Condition type value will not be posted into accounting.

Practice:
Go to V/08 → Select our Pricing procedure → Double click on Control → Go to New entries → Insert

Save

The Result will be

368 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Print:

This field controls whether to print the Condition type, Amount & Value into output or not. Output
means Printout, Email, Fax etc.

If we want to print the Condition type, Amount and Value in Output → Maintain Print as “X”.
If we don’t want to Print the Condition type, Amount and Value in Output → Maintain Print as “ “.

All Header conditions we maintain Print as “S”.

(Cost means Manufacturing Cost, Price means Selling Price)

Sub Total:

Subtotal will be used to store the values of Condition types in some temporary tables and fields for
the purpose of further calculations. (We do calculations in Calculation type and Base type.

Calculation type & Base type are Formulas

Any Condition type value if we want to use it in formula, then we have to store the condition type
value in some Subtotal.

Sub total 7 will be used only for Rebates.

Sub total A will be used for Credit management.
Sub total B will be used for Cost.

STEP CONDTYP DESCRIPTION Amount SUBTOTAL CAL TYPE

120 NET VAL 761355
130 HWST
140 VPRS 500000 B

160 PROFIT MARGIN 11

Net Value - Cost
(KOMP-NETWR – KOMP-WAVWR)
(761355 – 500000) = 261355

369 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Practice:
Example 1:

Go to V/08 → Select our Pricing procedure → Double click on Control → Go to New entries & Insert

Step Cond Type Description Statistics Cal type

160 PROFIT MARGIN  11

(Select 11 click on Source text → We can find the ABAP coding for Calculation type 11)

Create Order and see the result. Result will be

Example 2: Maintain Subtotal B for HWST, the Result will be

Example 3: Maintain Subtotal B for H007, Result will be

“We have to maintain Subtotal “B” only for VPRS condition type only”

370 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

22042022

Subtotal will also be used to update the Sales document values into Credit management.
The Subtotal for Credit management is “A”.

Subtotal will also be used to update the Billing document values into Rebate agreement.
The Subtotal for Rebate agreement is “7”.

The Subtotal for Cost is “B”.

Calculation Type:

Calculation Type is a formula.

If we maintain formula in calculation type, then system calculates and propose Condition value.
If we maintain formula in calculation type, then no need to maintain Condition records because
system is directly proposing Condition value.

Base Type:

Base type is a formula.

If we maintain formula in Base type, then system calculates and propose Base value.
If we maintain formula in Base type, then we have to maintain Condition records to covert the Base
value into Condition Value.

Q. What is the difference between Calculation type and Base type?

Calculation Type Base Type

1. If we maintain formula in Calculation 1. If we maintain formula in Base type,

type, then system calculates and propose then system calculates and propose
only Condition value. only Base value.
2. If we maintain Formula in Calculation
type, then no need to maintain condition 2. If we maintain formula in Base type,
record. Because system is directly then we have to maintain Condition
proposing Condition value. records to convert the Base value into
Condition value.

If we already have Condition records and if we require formula for that step, then maintain formula
in Base type.

If we don’t have Condition record and if we require formula for that step, then maintain formula in
Calculation type.

371 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
 SAP-SD RAVI BERI

25042022

Example 1: Forward Pricing

Step Condition type Description From To Stat Value
10 PR00 900000
20 Base Value 10  900000
30 MWST (18%) 20 162000
40 Total Value 20 30  1062000

Reverse Pricing
Step Cond Descr Fro Man Stat Sub Cal type Base type Base Val Cond Val
total
10 ZR00   1 1062000
ZR00*100/118
20 MWST (KOMP-KZWI1)*100/118
900000 162000
(18%) 1062000*100/118

30 Base  ZR00-MWST
900000
(KOMP-KZWI1 – KOMP-KZWI2)
Value 1062000 - 162000

40 PR00 30 900000
(100%)

Example 2: Forward Pricing

Step Condition type Description From To Stat Value
10 PR00 900000.00
20 Base Value 10  900000.00
30 K007 (-12%) 20 -108000.00
40 Gross Value 20 30  792000.00
50 KF00 (4%) 40 31680.00
60 Net Value 40 50  823680.00
70 MWST (18%) 60 148262.40
80 Total Value 60 70  971942.40

Reverse Pricing
Step Cond Descr Fro Man Stat Sub Cal type Base type Base Val Cond Val
total
10 ZR00   1 971942.40
ZR00*100/118
20 MWST 2 (KOMP-KZWI1) *100/118
823680.00 148262.40
(18%) 971942.40*100/118

30 Net  3 (ZR00-MWST)
(KOMP-KZWI1) - (KOMP-KZWI2)
823680.00
Value 971942-148262
Net Value *100/104
40 KF00 4 (KOMP-KZWI3) *100/104
792000.00 31680.00
(4%) 823680*100/104

50 Gross  5 (Net Value-KF00)

(KOMP-KZW13) - (KOMP-KZW14)
792000.00
Value 823680-31680

Gross Value* 100/88%

60 K007 6 (KOMP-KZW15) *100/88
900000.00 -108000.00
(-12%) 792000*100/88

70 Base  Gross value-K007

(KOMP-KZW15) - (KOMP-KZW16)
900000.00
Value 792000-(-108000)

80 PR00 900000.00
(100%)

372 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

The T-Code to develop Pricing routines/Pricing formulas VOFM

ABAPer is responsible to develop Pricing Routines or Pricing formulas.

VOFM → Formulas (In Menu bar) → Condition value

(User defined formula number should be 900 and above)

Pricing Requirement:

Pricing requirement is a condition which system will check every time while determining the
Condition type into Sales document. If the requirement fulfils then only the Condition type will be
determined into Sales document. If the requirement is not fulfilled then the Condition type will not
be determined into Sales document.

Standard 2 1. Pricing field in Item Category 1. Check KOMP-PRSFD CA “BX”

Requirement should be “X” or “B” 2. Check KOM-KZNEP-KZNEP=SPACE
2. Exclusion field in Condition type
controls should be “Blank”
VPRS 4 1. Determine cost field in Item 1. Check KOMP-EVRWR=”X”
category should be checked 2. Check T001-BUKRS=T001K-BUKRS
2. Ordering company and Delivering 3. Check KOMP-WERKS-WERKS NE
company should be same. SPACE
3. Plant should not be blank
SKTO 9 1. Cash Discount field in Material 1. Check KOMP-SKTOF=”X”
Master should be checked.
MWST 10 1. Plant should not be Blank 1. Check KOMP-WERKS NE SPACE

The T-code to develop new requirement is VOFM

Requirements → Pricing →

(User defined requirement number should be 900 and above)

Account Key:

This field is one of the parameters to determine revenue G/L accounts while posting Invoice values
into accounting.

373 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Q. There is a Condition type which is statistical and if I assign Account key, will it post into
accounting or not?
Ans. No

Accruals:

Accruals is a provisional account which will help to keep some money aside from each transaction to
meet the future requirement of Rebate settlement.

The Account key for Accruals is ERU. Accruals will be used only for Rebates.

Standard Account Keys

Accruals ERU
Base Type ERS
Discount ERS
Discount ERS
Freight ERS
Tax MWS
Rebates ERB

Q. There is a Condition type which is statistical but still want to post into some G/L account, where
is the control?
Condition Class “C” along with Accruals “ERU”

Q. What sequence system follows out of the 16 fields of Pricing procedure while determining the
price into Sales document?

1. Step
2. Counter
3. Condition Type
4. Requirement
5. Sub total
6. Base type
7. Calculation type
8. From
9. To

Q. Explain How Pricing determines into Sales document?

1. System will determine Pricing procedure based on Sales Area, Document Pricing Procedure,
Customer Pricing Procedure.
2. System will go inside the Pricing procedure got to first step take the Condition type and check
whether the requirement fulfils or not. If the requirement fulfils then
3. System will go inside the Condition type and take the Access Sequence.
4. System will go inside the Access Sequence and take the Condition tables.
5. System will go inside the Condition table and take the combination of fields.
6. System will go inside the Condition record and check the Valid Condition record. If system
finds valid condition record, then system will determine it into Sales document.

Like that the process will go all the steps in Pricing procedure.
374 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Example:

Order VA01
Doc Pri Proc
Order Type HOR “A”

Sales Org 100

Dist. Channel H1
Division H1
Cust Pri Proc
Customer 100551 “1”
Material VAXINE1500

HR00 9500

Step-1: Pricing Procedure determination (T-Code: OVKK)

[Link] [Link] Div [Link] CPP Pricing Proc
H100 H1 H1 A 1 HVAA01

Step-2: Pricing Procedure (T-Code: V/08)

HVAA01
Step Cond Type Req
10 HR00 2 If requirement fulfils

Step-3: Condition Type

HR00 Access Sequence HR00

Step-4: Access Sequence

HR00
10 618
20 621
30 622

Step-5: Condition Table

618 [Link]/Customer/Material

Step-6: Condition Records

H100/100551/VAXINE1500 9500

375 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Pricing Report

Pricing report will help to display the list of all condition records at one place in a proper format.

T-Code: V/LA

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Pricing → Maintain Pricing Report

Double Click on Create Pricing Report

Mention

Name of List : H1
Title : Alkem Pricing Repot
Select the Fields which we determined → Click on OR

Select the Tables → Press Enter

Mention

Scroll down for the Remaining fields mention it as Item

Check all the Check boxes below & Save

The T-Code to execute Pricing report is V/LD

Mention

Pricing Report : H1
Execute
Mention Sales Organization & Execute

Clients’ requirement is if Customer purchased some slow-moving materials (HX, HY, HZ), then they
want to offer 20 days extra Credit period. Where is the Control?
Go to the Condition records → Additional Data → Additional Value Days “20”.

Clients’ requirement is if customer purchased some fast-moving materials, then don’t want to offer
Credit period. Where is the Control?
Go to the Condition records → Additional Data → Maintain Terms of Payment as “0001”.

376 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

29042022

QUESTIONS IN PRICING

1. What is Condition technique?

Condition Technique is the process of determining Condition records into Sales document.

2. What is the common T-Code for Pricing?

VOK0

3. What is Condition Table?

Condition table is the combination of fields which

4. What is Access Sequence?

It is the search strategy which will

5. What happens if I check exclusive in Access Sequence?

6. What happens if I uncheck exclusive in Access Sequence?

7. Why we assign condition type in Pricing procedure determination?

8. What is field catalogue?

Field catalogue consists of list of allowed fields to create condition tables

9. If the field is not available in field catalogue as a consultant, what will you do?

10. Condition table will be saved in which request?

11. What happens if I save Condition table in Local object?

12. Where is the control that system will not activate multiple base price condition type?
Condition Class “B”

13. Where is the Control that Tax amount will not be added to Net amount?
Condition Class “D”

14. There is a condition type which is statistical but still I want to post it into some G/L
account?
Condition Class “C” along with accruals ERU

15. Where is the control whether to add the condition type amount or whether to deduct the
condition type amount?

16. What is the purpose of Calculation type?

17. What is the purpose of Condition category?

377 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

18. When we use Group condition concept?

19. What is the purpose of Group condition routine?

20. What happens if I check Rounding difference comparison?

21. What is Condition supplement?

22. What is Condition Index?

23. What is the T-Code to change / Display Condition Index?

V/I5, V/I6

24. What is Condition update?

Restricting the Condition records up to particular quantity/Value/[Link] Orders.

25. How System cumulate quantities in Condition update concept?

Info Structure S071

26. What happens if I maintain Exclusion?

27. How many places we can maintain Exclusion and where?

28. What scenarios system activates multiple Base price condition types?
Graduated Scales

29. What is Exclusion groups?

30. What is the Standard Base?

From

31. When we use Counter?

32. What happens if I check manual?

33. What happens if I check required?

34. What happens if I check statistics?

35. What is the purpose of Sub-total?

36. What is the difference between Calculation type and Base type?

37. What is the standard requirement and what it checks?

38. What is the requirement for VPRS and what it checks?

378 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

04052022

39. What is the T-Code to create pricing report?

40. What is the T-Code to execute Pricing report?

41. Clients’ requirement is if customer purchase some slow materials, then they want to offer
20 days extra period. Where is the control?

42. Clients’ requirement is if customer purchase some fast moving materials, then they don’t
want to offer credit period. Where is the control?

43. Configure the Following

Group 1
Materials: A, B, C
Conditions:
If order is greater than 10 Lakhs, then they want to offer Rs.20000 Discount.
If Order value is between 5 to 10 Lakhs, then they want to offer Rs.5000 Discount.

Group 2
Materials: X, Y, Z
Conditions:
If order is greater than 10 Lakhs, then they want to offer Rs.15000 Discount.
If Order value is between 5 to 10 Lakhs, then they want to offer Rs.4000 Discount.

If Total Document value is Rs.50 Lakhs, then they want to offer Rs.50000 Discount.
If total Document value is less than 5 Lakhs, then they want to offer Rs.3000 Discount.

Order Order Order Order

A 5L 20000 A 4L 20000 A 7L 50000 A 50K 3000
B 6L B 4L B 8L B 20K
C 4L C 9L C 30K
X 3L 4000 X 5L 15000 X 8L X 60K
Y 3L Y 5L Y 9L Y 50K
Z 5L Z 10L Z 40K

379 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

44. Clients’ requirement is they want to introduce new discount condition type in existing
pricing procedure and this new discount condition type should automatically appear while
creating Invoice to already created Sales order.
Go to the newly added condition type and maintain Condition category as “L”. “L” means
“Generally new when copying”.

Order Order Order Pricing Procedure Order

10 HR00 10 HR00 10 HR00 10 HR00 10 HR00
20 Base Val 20 Base Val 20 Base Val 20 Base Val 20 Base Val
30 H004 30 H004 30 H004 30 H004 30 H004
40 H005 40 H005 40 H005 40 H005 40 H005
45 HDIS (New) 45 HDIS (New)
50 H007 50 H007 50 H007 50 H007 50 H007
60 H020 60 H020 60 H020 60 H020 60 H020
70 Gross Val 70 Gross Val 70 Gross Val 70 Gross Val 70 Gross Val
80 HF00 80 HF00 80 HF00 80 HF00 80 HF00
90 HINS 90 HINS 90 HINS 90 HINS 90 HINS
100 HPAC 100 HPAC 100 HPAC 100 HPAC 100 HPAC
110 HLOD 110 HLOD 110 HLOD 110 HLOD 110 HLOD
120 Net Val 120 Net Val 120 Net Val 120 Net Val 120 Net Val

45. If Condition type is not determined into Sales document, then as a consultant what will we
do?
Go to Analysis

46. Clients’ requirement is they want to update new price in already created Sales order?
Where is the control?
Click on Update in Conditions tab in Sales order document.

47. If Condition record/Condition type is not determined into Sales document, As a consultant
what parameters will we check?
1. Condition Record is missing
2. Check Customer Pricing procedure
3. Check Document Pricing procedure
4. Check requirement is fulfilled or not
5. Check Condition type is manual
6. Check the scales
7. Check the Validity periods
8. Check the Price related fields in Customer Master and Material master.
9. Check Condition update concept
10. Check exclusion is maintained
11. Check Pricing procedure determination
12. Check whether the Condition record is deleted

48. What sequence system follows out of the 16 fields of Pricing procedure while determining
the Price into Sales document?

380 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

49. Explain How Pricing determines into Sales document?

50. What do you mean by Pricing routines?

Calculation type formula, Base type formulas are Pricing routines.

51. How many Pricing procedures your client is having?

5 Pricing procedures
One for Standard
One for Free of Charge
One for Credit Memo/Debit Memo
One for STO
One for Consignment

381 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

05052022

GST
(Goods & Services Tax)

GST Configurations:

Condition type Type of GST

IGST If the Sale is between 2 states,
JOIG
(Integrated GST) then IGST will be determined
CGST
JOCG If the Sale is within the State,
(Central GST)
then CGST & SGST will
SGST
JOSG determine
(State GST)

Pricing Configuration for GST:

Step-1: Create Condition Tables (T-Code: V/03)

1. Create Condition Table for IGST

(Departure Country/Region of Delivering Plant/Region of Ship to Party/

Tax Classification 1 of Customer/Tax Classification of Material/Control Code)

2. Create Condition Table for CGST

(Departure Country/Region of Delivering Plant/Region of Ship to Party/
Tax Classification 2 of Customer/Tax Classification 2 of Material/Control Code)

3. Create Condition Table for SGST

(Departure Country/Region of Delivering Plant/Region of Ship to Party/
Tax Classification 3 of Customer/Tax Classification 3 of Material/Control Code)

(Country - Field Name: ALAND, Region - Field Name: REGIO)

Step-2: Create Access Sequence (T-Code: V/07)

1. Create Access Sequence for IGST

HOIG IGST Access Sequence
Sequence Table Exclusive
10 xxx “”

2. Create Access Sequence for CGST

HOCG CGST Access Sequence
Sequence Table Exclusive
10 xxx “”

3. Create Access Sequence for SGST

HOSG SGST Access Sequence
Sequence Table Exclusive
10 xxx “”

382 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-3: Create Condition types (T-Code: V/06)

1. Create Condition type for IGST

Copy JOIG (Standard)/MWST and Rename it as HOIG
Change the Access Sequence to HOIG
Enter & Save

2. Create Condition type for CGST

Copy JOCG (Standard)/MWST and Rename it as HOCG
Change the Access Sequence to HOCG
Enter & Save

3. Create Condition type for SGST

Copy JOSG (Standard)/MWST and Rename it as HOSG
Change the Access Sequence to HOSG
Enter & Save

Step-4: Place the Condition types in Pricing procedure (T-Code: V/08)

Place the Condition types after Net value

Go to our Pricing Procedure → Double click on Control → New Entries →

Remove HWST

Create New Account keys in SD

Path:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic functions → Account assignment costing → Revenue
account determination → Define and Assign Account Keys → Double click on Define Account
Key

Click on New entries

Mention
Save

Create New Account keys in FI (T-Code: OBCN)

Go to New Entries & Mention’

DO the same process for CGST & SGST also.

Again, go back to V/08 and place the Condition types in our Pricing procedure

Step Cou Ctyp Fro To Ma R Sta P SubTot Req Cal Typ BasTyp AccKey
130 HOIG 120 10 16 HOI
131 HOCG 120 10 16 HOC
132 HOSG 120 10 16 HOS

383 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-5: Define Tax determination Rules

Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Taxes → Define Tax Determination Rules

Go to Country IN and Mention

Tax count. Name Seq. Tax categ. Name

IN India 1 HOIG IGST

New Entries

Tax count. Name Seq. Tax categ. Name

IN India 2 HOCG CGST
IN India 3 HOSG SGST

Save & go back

Click on Define Tax relevancy of Master Records

Double Click on Customer Taxes
New Entries & Mention

Double click on Material taxes

New Entries & Mention

Go to the T-Code OBBG

Go to Country IN
Mention the Tax procedure as “TAXINN”

(If IN is not available: Go to T-Code: OBYZ → Double click on procedures → New Entries → Mention
TAXINN – Indian Taxes → Save)

384 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-6: Create Tax code for IGST, CGST, SGST (T-Code: FTXP)

Mention Country: IN & Enter

For IGST: Mention tax code: HI & Enter

Continue & save it

For CGST: Mention Tax code: HC & Enter

Continue & save it

For SGST: Mention Tax code: HS & Enter

Continue & save it

Step-7: Define HSN Code (T-Code: J1ID)

Select Chapter ID and Click on Maintain

Go to New Entries and Mention

Save
385 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-8: Go to Customer Master

Control Data
Mention GST Registration number in TAX Number 3 field

Sales Area Data → Billing tab

Mention Tax Classification as “1”

(Go to 2 different Customer and change the Region to Maharashtra for one of the Customer for
practice)

Step-9: Go to Material Master

Go to Material →
Sales Org 1 → Tax Classification “1”
Foreign Trade export → Mention Control code: [Link].0001 (Defines by us) & Save

Step-10:

Maintain Condition Records for IGST (T-Code: VK11)

(For IGST both Region should be different)

Mention Condition Type: HOIG & Enter

Country : IN
Reg of dlv. Plant: 06
Control code Amount Tax Code
Region : 36 [Link].0001 (Defines by us) 22 HI
TaxClass1-Cust : 1
TaxClass1-Matl : 1 Save

Create Order and Check the Conditions tab → We should get HOIG (IGST)

Maintain Condition Records for CGST

Mention Condition Type: HOCG & Enter

Country : IN
Reg of dlv. Plant: 06 Control code Amount Tax Code
Region : 06 [Link].0001 (Defines by us) 12 HC
TaxClass2-Cust : 1
TaxClass2-Matl : 1 Save

Maintain Condition Records for SGST

Mention Condition Type: HOSG & Enter

Country : IN
Reg of dlv. Plant: 06 Control code Amount Tax Code
Region : 06 [Link].0001 (Defines by us) 12 HS
TaxClass2-Cust : 1
TaxClass2-Matl : 1 Save

Create Order and Check the Conditions tab → We should get HOCG (CGST) & HOSG (SGST)

386 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

06052022

Step-11: Activate Business Place

PATH:
SPRO → Cross Application Components → General Application Functions → Business Place →
Activate Business Place

Go to New Entries → Mention

Country : IN
Check BP Active 

Go back and click on Define Business Places

Mention the Company Code: H100 → Continue

Go to New Entries → Mention

Business Place : H100 Maharashtra Business Place

Tax Number 3 : GST Registration Number (Not Available in Practice System)

Click On Address

Mention

Name : Maharashtra Business Place

Country : IN
Region : 13 (As per the Plant)
Save

Do the Same Process for H200

Go back and click on Assign Business Places to Plants

Go to Our Plant and Assign Business Place & Save

(We can Assign same Business Place for different Plants, if the plants are located in Same state.)

387 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-12: Create G/L Account for GST

T-Code: FS00

If we are getting a different Screen in FS00 then

Go to Settings → Hierarchy Display → Don not Display Navigation Tree → Continue → Continue

Go to FS00

G/L Account : 202010

Click on With Template

Mention

G/L Account : 175000

Company Code : H100
Continue
Change the
Short Text : IGST
G/L Acct Long Text : Integrated GST

Do the Same Process for CGST (G/L Account 303010) & SGST (G/L Account 404010)

Step-13: Assign G/L Accounts for GST

T-Code: SM30

Mention

Table : J_1IT030K_V
Click on Maintain

Mention
Chart of Accounts : INT
Transaction : HOI (Account Key)
Click on Continue

Go to New Entries & Mention

Save

Go Back and Click on maintain again and

do the same process for HOC & HOS.

388 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-14: Assign GSTG/L Account in OB40

Double Click on Account key HOI

Chart of Accounts; INT → Click on Continue → Check tax Code

Save

Click on Posting Key

Mention

Save

Click on Accounts

Mention the Tax Code: HI

Save

Do the Same Process for CGST & SGST

Create Order, Delivery & Invoice and See the Accounting Document

389 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

QUESTIONS IN GST

1. What is your Clients Tax Procedure?

TAXINN

2. Where we maintain company GST Registration number?

Business Place → Tax Number 3 Field

3. Where we maintain Customers GST Registration number?

Customer Master → Control Data Tab → Tax Number 3 Field

4. What is HSN Code and What is the purpose of it?

HSN – Harmonized System Nomenclature, It will help to determine the Tax rate.

5. Where we maintain HSN codes?

Material Master → Foreign Trade Export → Control Code

6. What is the Table to Assign GST-G/L Accounts?

J_1IT030K_V

7. What is the Standard Condition type for IGST?

JOIG

8. What is the Standard Condition type for CGST?

JOCG

9. What is the Standard Condition type for SGST?

JOSG

10. What is the Standard Account key for IGST?

JOI

11. What is the Standard Account key for CGST?

JOC

12. What is the Standard Account key for SGST?

JOS

390 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FREE GOODS

Free Goods means Offering the Goods Free of Cost in relation to main item.

Free Goods is of 2 types

1. Inclusive Free Goods

2. Exclusive Free Goods

INCLUSIVE FREE GOODS EXCLUSIVE FREE GOODS

ORDER ORDER
X Order Qty 200 X Order Qty 200
Main Item Qty 160 Main Item Qty 200
Free Goods Qty 40 Free Goods Qty 40

1. In Inclusive Free Goods the Free 1. In Exclusive Free Goods the Free Goods
Goods Quantity is included in Order Quantity is excluded from Order
Quantity. Quantity.
2. In Inclusive Free Goods we can offer 2. In Exclusive Free Goods we can offer
only same Material as Free. same Material or Different material as
Free.

07052022

Inclusive free Goods is of 2 Types

Inclusive with Item Generation Inclusive without Item Generation

X Order Qty 200 X Order Qty 200 Value 160000
Main Item Qty 160 Value 160000 Main Item Qty 200000
Value 0 NRAB - 40000
Free Goods Qty 40 40000
R100 -40000

In Inclusive with Item Generation the Free Goods will be determined as Separate line items. And
here R100 condition determines and make the Free Goods value Zero.

In Inclusive without Item Generation the Free Goods will not be determined as Separate line items.
And here NRAB Condition type Determines and deduct the Value of Free Goods from Main Item
Value.

391 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CONFIGURATION FOR FREE GOODS

1. The Item Category for Free Goods is TANN

In TANN Pricing field is “B”

2. Item Category Determination

Sales Document Type OR

Item Category Group NORM
Item Usage FREE
Higher Level Item Cat TAN
Default Item Category TANN

3. Place R100 Condition type in Pricing procedure after Net Value (T-Code: V/08)

Select Our Pricing Procedure → Double click on Control → Mention

Step CTyp From Reqt. Base Type Acc. Key

170 R100 120 55 28 ERS
180 NRAB 120 59 29 ERS

Requirement “55” Checks that Pricing field in Item Category should be “B”.
Only “TANN” Item Category will have Pricing “B”. So “R100” Condition type will determine
only for “TANN” Item Category.
Base Type formula “28” will deduct the value of Free Goods.

Requirement “59” checks that the free goods category should be “3”.
Base Type formula “29” will deduct the value of Free Goods from Main Item Value.

4. Condition Technique for Free Goods

Free Goods is also based on Condition Technique.

The Condition Technique for Free Goods will help to determine Free Goods Material
automatically in Sales document.

Step-1: Create Condition Table

Path:
SPRO → Sales and Distribution → Basic Functions → Free Goods → Condition Technique for
Free Goods → Maintain Condition Table →
Create Table with Sales org/Material (If it is General) → Generate the Table

Go back and Click on Maintain Access Sequences

Step-2: Maintain Access Sequences
The Standard Access Sequence for Free Goods is NA00
Go to New Entries → HA00 Free Goods → Create Access Sequence
Go back and Click on Maintain Condition types

392 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-3: Maintain Condition type

The Standard Condition type for Free Goods is NA00
Go to New Entries → Mention

Save
Go back and Click on Maintain Pricing Procedures

Step-4: Maintain Pricing Procedures (Free Goods Procedure)

The Standard Pricing Procedure for Free Goods is NA0001
Go to New Entries → Mention

Select the Procedure → Double click on Control Data

Go to New Entries → Mention

Save
Go back and click on Activate Free Goods Determination

Step-5: Activate Free Goods Determination

The Free Goods Procedure determines based on Sales Area, Document Pricing Procedure &
Customer Pricing Procedure.
Go to our Sales Area → Mention

Save

Step-6: Maintain Condition Records for Free Goods (T-Code: VBN1)

Mention Free Condition type “HA00” → Enter
Mention
Sales Organization : H100
Material : VAXINE1500
Minimum Qty : 100
From : 30
Unit of Measure : BT
Are Free goods :4
Adtl. Unit of Measure : BT
Calculation Rule : 1 (Pro Rata)
Free Goods Category : 1 (Inclusive rebate with item generation)
Free Goods Del Ctrl :E
Save

393 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Create Order and See the Result for “Free Goods with Item Generation”

Free Goods Line Item will generate

R100 Condition type will be determined into the Sales document.

Also Practice “Free Goods Without Item Generation”

Go to the T-Code: VBN2 (Change mode of Condition Records for Free Goods) → Change the
Free Goods category as “3”
There will be no Free Item
We will get NRAB Condition type determined in the Sales Order.

19052022

Exclusive Free Goods:

Maintain Condition Records (T-Code: VBN1)

Mention the Condition type: HA01 → Mention Sales Org (H100) → Click on Exclusive

Material : VAXINE15300100BOT
Min. Qty : 100
From : 30
Unit of measure : BT
Addtl Free Goods Qty : 4
Addtl Unit of Measure : BT
Calculation Rule :1
Free Goods Category : 2
Mention Addtl. Material: VAXI30500075BOT
Free Goods Del Ctrl :E
Save

If we want to give different Material as Free Goods if quantity increases

Go to Scales and Mention

Min. Qty : 300

From : 30 Unit of measure : BT
Addtl Free Goods Qty : 4
Addtl Unit of Measure : BT
Calculation Rule :1
Free Goods Category : 2
Mention Addtl. Material: VAXINE3333
Free Goods Del Ctrl :E
Save

394 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

FIELDS IN CONDIITON RECORDS (T-Code: VBN2)

Minimum Quantity:
It is the Quantity which Customer has to place order to Get eligible for Free Goods.

From Quantity:
From Quantity is the base quantity to calculate Free goods quantity.

Are Free goods:

Are Free goods means the actual free goods quantity in relation to from quantity.

Calculation Rule:
We have 3 types of Calculation Rules

1. Pro Rata
In Pro Rata the Free goods will be calculated in proportionate to From Quantity and Order
quantity.

From Qty Free Goods Qty

30 4
Order Qty Free Goods Qty
200 27

2. Unit Reference
In Unit Reference from Quantity will be considered as 1 Unit. And system will check no. of
units in Order quantity. And based on that System will propose free goods.

From Qty No. of Units Free Goods Qty

30 1 4
Order Qty Free Goods Qty
200 6 24

3. Whole Unit
In Whole unit if Order quantity is exactly equal with from quantity, then only system will
propose Free goods.

From Qty Free Goods Qty From Qty Free Goods Qty
30 30
Order Qty Nil Order Qty 28
200 200

Practice with different Calculation Rules.

Free Goods Category:

This Field Controls whether to go for inclusive Free goods or exclusive free goods. And it also
controls whether to go for Inclusive with Item generation or Inclusive without Item generation.

395 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Free Goods delivery control:

This field controls that the free goods should be delivered in proportionate to main item.

20052022

Cumulate Cost field in Copy Control: (T-Code: VTFL)

Path:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Free Goods → Controls Free Goods Pricing → Set
Transfer of Cost to Main Item.
Go to Change Mode → Go to F2-LF Combination (or our Document types e.g., HF2-HLF) → Click on
Continue → Select the Combination → Double Click on Item

Select Item Category TANN → Go to Details

Check Cumulate Cost

If we check Cumulate Cost, then System will transfer the Cost of Free Good item to Main item.

396 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

OR RO CS CF CI CP
Document Category C C C CF CI CP

QUESTIONS IN FREE GOODS

1. What is the difference between Inclusive Free Goods and Exclusive Free Goods?

2. What is the Difference between Inclusive with Item generation and Inclusive without Item
generation?

3. What is the requirement for R100 and what it checks?

4. What is the Base type formula for R100 and What it will do?

5. What is the requirement for NRAB and what it checks?

6. What is the Base type formula for NRAB and what it will do?

7. Explain various calculation rules in Free goods?

8. Where is the control that whether to go for Inclusive free goods and Exclusive free goods?

9. Where is the Control whether to for for Inclusive with Item generation or Inclusive without
Item generation?

10. What is the purpose of Free goods delivery control?

11. Can I have different materials as Free goods based on the quantity and where is the
control?

12. Clients’ requirement is they want to transfer the cost of Free good item to main item.
Where is the Control?
Check Cumulate Cost

13. Can I determine automatic free goods in Inquiry and Quotation?

No, it is a Gap in SAP

14. Can I offer multiple materials as Free goods?

No, it is a Gap in SAP

15. Clients’ requirement is they want Free goods in return order? How to do this?
Create Return Order with the Reference to Order.

397 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

For Free Goods in Return Order maintain

Go to the T-Code: VOV4 RE
NORM
Usage “ “
[Link] REN
RENN

Scenario:

Clients’ requirement they have some group of Materials (X, Y, Z). IF these Materials are determined
as Free goods, then they want to offer only 50% discount.

E.g.,

A
B Free 100% Discount

D
X Free 50% Discount

398 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

MATERIAL DETERMINATION

Material determination means Substituting one material in place of other material.

The below scenarios we substitute one material in place of other material.

1. If Stock is not available

2. If the product is discontinued

Material determination is of 2 types

1. Manual
2. Automatic

Material Determination

Manual Automatic

Auto Replacement Substituted Item will be displayed as Sub-item

Header Pricing Item Pricing

X TAX X TAPA
Y TAPS Y TAN

OR OR OR
NORM NORM NORM
PSEL PSHP PSA2
TAX “ “
TAPS TAX

399 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Configuration for Material Determination:

Material Determination is also based on Condition technique.

Path: SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Material Determination → Maintain Ore-
Requisite for Material determination

Step-1: Create Condition Table

Double Click on create condition tables

Create Condition table with the combination of Sales organization and Material entered.

Step-2: Maintain Access Sequence

Doble click on Maintain Sequence

The standard access sequence is “A001”
Create our own Access sequence e.g., H001

Step-3: Define Condition types

Double click on Define condition type

The standard condition type is “A001”
Define our Condition type “H001” and assign the Access Sequence “H001”
Save

Step-4: Maintain Procedure

Double click on Maintain Procedure

The standard procedure is “A00001”
Define our Pricing procedure “H00001”
Maintain as

Save

Step-5: Assign Procedures to Sales Document Types (Go back to the Path)

Go to our document type “HOR” → Mention the Procedure “H00001”

Save

400 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-6: Define Substitution Reason

Go to New Entries → Mention

Entry:

This field controls in case of auto replacement which material should be printed in the
output. i.e., Material entered or substituted material.
If we check Entry, then Material entered will be printed in the output.
If we uncheck Entry, then Substituted item will be printed in the output.

Warning:

This field is applicable for auto replacement.

If we check warning, then in case of auto replacement before substitution system will give
warning message

Strategy:

This field controls whether to go for manual substitution or automatic substitution

“Blank” means automatic
“A” means manual

Outcome:

This field controls whether to go for auto replacement or Substitute item should be
displayed as sub-item. And it also controls if substituted item is displayed as subitem then
whether to go for Header pricing or Item pricing.
“Blank” means auto replacement
“A” Substituted item is displayed as subitem with Header Pricing
“B” Substituted item is displayed as subitem with Item Pricing.

Step-7: Maintain Condition records for Material determination (T-Code: VB11)

Path: Easy Access → Logistics → Sales & Distribution → Master Data → Material
determination → VB11-Create

Mention the material determination type “H001” and Enter

Mention the Sales organization
Mention the Reason “HHHH”
Mention the material entered : VAXI3050075BOT
Material : VAXINE3333
Save

401 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

24052022

Practice: Practice VA01 with different options of Substitution reason i.e., Step-6

MRP Indicator in Material Determination (T-Code: VB11):

If we check MRP indicator, then if stock of that Material is not available then it will
substitute alternate Material.

QUESTIONS

1. Where is the Control whether to go for manual substitution or automated substitution?

Strategy “A” or Blank

2. Clients’ requirement is Substituted item should be displayed as Sub-item with item pricing?
Maintain Outcome as “B”

3. Clients’ requirement is Substituted item should be printed in output? Where is the control?
Uncheck Entry

402 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

LISTING / EXCLUSION

Listing means allowing some materials to customers for sales. Exclusion means restricting some
materials to customers for sales.

Listing/Exclusion is also based on Condition technique.

Configuration for Listing/Exclusion

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Listing/Exclusion

Step-1: Maintain condition tables for listing/exclusion

Double click on Maintain tables for listing/exclusion

Go to Create Mode (Condition → Create)
Create Condition table with the combination of
Sales Organization/Customer/Material
Generate → Save

Step-2: Maintain Access Sequence for listing/exclusion

Double Click on Maintain Access Sequence for listing/exclusion

The standard Access sequence for Listing is “A001”, and for Exclusion “B001”
Go to New Entries and define our own (H001 for listing)
Select and double click on Accesses

Go to New Entries and maintain the Table

Select the Access Sequence → Double-click on Fields

403 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Save

Maintain Access Sequence for Exclusion (H002) also

Step-3: Maintain Listing/Exclusion types

Double click on Maintain Listing/Exclusion type

The standard condition type for listing is “A001” and Exclusion is “B001”
Define our own

Save

Step-4: Procedure for maintaining listing/exclusion

Double click on procedure for maintaining listing/exclusion

The standard procedures for listing are “A00001” and exclusion is “B00001”
Go to New Entries and define our own

Save

Step-5: Activate listing/exclusion by sales document type

Double click on Activate listing

Go to our Sales document type and mention our listing/exclusion procedures and save.

Step-6: Optimize accesses

Double click on optimize accesses → Go to New entries and mention → Save

404 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-7: Maintain Condition records for Listing (T-Code: VB01)

Path: Logistics → Sales & Distribution → Master Data → Products → Listing/Exclusion

Mention Listing/exclusion type (H001)

Mention Sales Organization, Customer and Materials

Save

Maintain Condition records for Exclusion (T-Code: VB01)

Mention Listing/exclusion type (H002)

Mention Sales Organization, Customer and Materials

Save

Practice listing/exclusion

405 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

CROSS SELLING

Cross Selling means selling additional products along with the main product.

Item Category Determination for Cross Selling:

X TAN
Y TAN

Sales Doc Type OR

Item Cat Grp NORM
Usage CSEL
Higher Level TAN
Item Cat TAN

Configuration for Cross Selling:

PATH:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Cross Selling → Define Determination procedure
for Cross selling

Step-1: Create Condition Table

Create Condition Table with the combination of Sales Organization & Material
Generate the Table

Step-2: Maintain Access Sequence

Double click on Maintain Access Sequence

The standard Access sequence for Cross selling is “C001”
Go to New Entries and mention our own (H001) → Select the new access sequence
→ Double Click on Accesses → Go to New Entries → Mention the Table & Description
→ Double Click on Fields → Save

406 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-3: Define Condition Types

Double click on Define Condition types → Go to New Entries

→ Create our Condition type (H001) →

The Standard Condition type for Cross selling is “CS01”

Save

Step-4: Maintain procedure

Double click on Maintain procedure

Standard procedure is “CS0001”
Go to New Entries and create our Procedure (HS0001)

Select the New procedure → Double click on Control

Go to New entries and Mention

407 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Save

Step-5: Maintain Customer documents procedures for Cross selling

PATH:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Cross Selling → Maintain
Customer/Document procedures for Cross selling

Double click on Assign document procedure for cross selling

Go to our Sales document type and mention PP document procedure as “B”

Save

Step-6: Define & Assign Cross Selling Profile

PATH:
SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Cross Selling → Define and Assign Cross-
Selling Profile

Double click on Define cross-selling profiles → Mention

Save

408 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go back → Double Click on Assign Cross-selling profiles

Go to New Entries and mention

Save

Step-7: Maintain Condition Records (T-Code: VB41)

Path: Logistics → Sales & Distribution → Master Data → Products → Cross Selling

→ VB41

Mention “H001” and Enter

Mention the Sales Organization, Material

Save

Step-8:

Go to Customer Master Sales Area Data → Sales Tab → Mention PP customer procedure as
“B” and save.

Practice: Create Order and check

409 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

25052022

PRODUCT PROPOSAL

Product Proposal means automatic process of determining item proposal.

Configuration for Product Proposal:

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Dynamic Product Proposal

Step-1: Assign Document Procedure for Product Proposal to Sales Document Types.

Click on Assign Document Procedure for Product Proposal to Sales Document Types
Go to our Document type (HOR) → Mention PP Document Procedure as “A”

Save

Go back → Click on Maintain Table of Origin for Product proposal

Step-2: Define Product Proposal Procedure and Determine Access Sequences

Go back and click on Define Product Proposal Procedure and Determine Access Sequences
Go to New Entries and define PP Procedure (H0001-Item Proposal)
Standard procedure for PP Procedure is “A00001” and “A00002”

Select the Procedure and Double click on Access Sequence

410 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go to New Entries and Mention the Function Module as

Save

Function module for Item Proposal SD_DPP_PRODUCT_PROPOSAL

Function module for CMIR SD_DPP_CUSTOMER_MATERIAL_INFO
Function module for Listing SD_DPP_LISTING
Function module for Exclusion SD_DPP_EXCLUSION

Source

Step-3: Click on Maintain Procedure Determination (Online) for Product Procedure

Go back and Click on Maintain Procedure Determination (Online) for Product Procedure

Go to New Entries → Mention

Save

Step-4: Maintain PP Customer Procedure in Customer Master

Go to Customer Master → Enter the Customer Number, Company Code, Sales Area →

Click on Sales tab → Mention PP customer procedure as “A”

Practice:

Create Item Proposal (T-Code: VA51)

Maintain few Materials and Quantity for Item Proposal & Save
Note the Item Proposal number
Go to Customer Master and Maintain Item Proposal in Sales Area Data

Create Order and check the result

When we enter the Customer number system will automatically propose the Materials.

411 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

INCOMPLETION PROCEDURE / LOF OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS

It is a procedure which consist of list of mandatory fields which user has to enter while creating sales
document. If any of the mandatory field is missing in Sales document, then either system will not
allow to save the sales document or even if system allow to save the status of the document will be
incomplete and we cannot process incomplete document.

Table Field Screen Status

PO Number VBKD BSTKD PO Data H1 Delivery & Invoice
Incoterms1 VBKD INCO1 Billing H2 Delivery
Incoterms2 VBKD INCO2 Billing H2 Delivery
Payment Terms VBKD ZTERM Billing H3 Invoice
Shipping Conditions VBAK VSBED Shipping H2 Delivery

PATH:

SPRO → Sales & Distribution → Basic Functions → Log-Off Incomplete Items

Step-1: Define Incompleteness Procedures

Click on Define Incompleteness Procedures → Select Group “A” Sales Header

Go to change mode → New Entries → Define Procedure →

Select the Procedure and Double click on fields

412 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Go to New Entries and Mention

Save

Step-2: Assign Incompleteness Procedures

Go back and Click on Assign on Incompleteness Procedures in the Path

Double click on Assign procedures to the sales document types

Click on position → go to our document types

For Practice purpose:

Go to Assign procedures to item categories → Go to our Item category (HTAN) →

Remove the Procedure

Go to Schedule line category → Go to our Schedule line category (HP) → Remove

THE Procedure

Step-3: Define Status Groups

Go back and click on Define Status Groups in the path

Go to New entries and maintain

Save

413 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES
SAP-SD RAVI BERI

Step-4: Define Incompleteness procedures

Go back and click on Define Incompleteness procedure

Select Group “A” → Double click on Procedures

Select our procedures → Double click on fields → Go to change mode → Mention the Status

Save

Practice:

Create Order without incoterms and the system will not allow to delivery.

(If we to save incomplete document go to VOV8 → Our Document type → Uncheck Incomplete
messages)

(If we want to see the status of the Order → Go to Change mode of Order → Click on Status → Check
the Header status)

Create Order without Payment terms and the system will allow to create Delivery but will not allow
to create Invoice.

414 | P a g e
PROPEL TECHNOLOGIES